在教学过程中，老师教学的首要任务是备好教案课件，又到了写教案课件的时候了。写好教案课件，可以避免重点内容被忽略。您是否对“七年级新目标英语教案”有些疑问看看的编辑为您准备的资料吧，祝愿这些参考内容可以为你的工作或学习带来实质性的帮助！此外，关于，您还可以浏览。
七年级新目标英语教案【篇1】
【教材分析】
本模块以出行旅游为话题。对话是通过读地图来呈现指路及表明具体位置的语言表达方式。通过本单元的听说活动，给学生提供充足的体验和运用语言的机会。
【学情分析】
学生具有一定的英语基础，学习热情高，表现欲强，能积极参与到课堂中。而且相互之间能够很好地利用小组进行合作交流。
【教学目标】
Knowledge objective:
To master some words and expressions about places, positions and giving directions.Ability objective:
1.To ask the way and give directions.2.To understand a conversation of giving directions.Moral objective:
1.To be polite to others.2.To be ready to help others.3.To know more about Beijing and love Beijing.【教学重点】
1.To learn some words and expressions about places：
Bank, museum, along, across, cross, opposite, tourist, excuse, excuse me, street ,turn, third, guidebook, bookshop, right, why not ?? could, underground
2.To learn and review some words about positions: near,opposite, along, on the left/right, across.3.To learn some expressions about asking ways and giving directions:
【教学难点】
1.To get information from the conversation.2.To ask the way and give directions.【教学方法】
PWP method, task-based method and interactive approach.【教学手段】
A tape recorder, multimedia ,PPT courseware, the teaching CD and some pictures.【教学过程】 Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Revision【复习】
1、listen to an English song.Aim : to activate the classroom atmosphere.2、Do a duty :
Aim :To give one student a chance to train his spoken Englishin every class.3、Talking and acting:
Aim :to check if the students can practice the topic of the last
module and to develop the students’speaking and language expressing abilities.Step 2 Leading in
【导入】
1、Play a guessing game: The teachers shows the pictures ofnew words and let the students say as quickly as possible.Ai : to check if the students preview the new lesson before the class and to be familiar with them.2、Look, think and say: the teacher shows some pictures aboutgiving directions and some road signs and asks the students to think and say the phrases.Aim :to consolidate the phrases about giving directions.3、Find and say.The teacher shows pictures of direction prepositions, and the students find the right words and make some sentences with the direction prepositons.Aim : to understand and master the usage of the directionprepositions.【总结】
1.Do some exercises about the direction prepositions。2.Do some exercises about the patterns of asking for and giving directions.
七年级新目标英语教案【篇2】
Unit 1 Can you play the guitar ?】
1、can+动词原形，它不随主语和数而变化。
(1)含有can的肯定句：主语+can+谓语动词的原形+其他。
(2)变一般疑问句时，把can提前：Can+主语+动词原形+其他?
肯定回答：Yes，主语+can。否定回答：No，主语+can't.
(3)含有can的否定句：主语+can't+动词的原形+其他。
(4)含有can的特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+can+主语+动词原形+其他?
2、may+动词的原形。(may为情态动词)一般疑问句是把may提前，
肯定回答是：Yes，主语 +may。否定回答是：No，主语+mustn't。或please don't。
join+某个组织，俱乐部，party，参军，党派等 “加入”
Join sb. “参加到某人中” join in (doing)sth “加入做......，参加某个活动” Join in=take part in +活动，比赛
3、说某种语言：speak+语言 4、play+球、棋、牌;play+the+乐器。
5、擅长于(做)什么：be good at +名词/动ing
6、帮助某人做某事：help sb. (to ) do sth. help sb. with sth.
7、我能知道你名字吗?May I know your name?
8、想要做什么：want to do sth 例如：I want to learn about art.
9、What club do you want to join?
I want to join the chess club and the basketball club.
10、What club does Tom want to join? He wants to join the swimming club .
11、He can’t play the violin or the piano. Can you help kids with swimming?
12、Why do you want to join the English club? Because I want to learn English well.
七年级新目标英语教案【篇3】
人教版新目标七年级下册英语第九单元教案
七年级新目标英语教案【篇4】
No. 110 Middle School of Chongqing By Cao Yi
Teaching Goal:
1. General aims:
Talk about jobs.
2. Particular aims:
A. Language Focus.
Talk about jobs and the place where people work.
B. Language goals
(1). What do you do? I’m a reporter.
(2). What does she want to be? She wants to be a sales assistant.
C. Language structures:
(1). What do you do? I am a teacher.
(2). What does he want to do? He wants to be an officer.
(3). Does your father work? Yes, he does.
(4). What does your mother do?
D. Useful words and phrases:
Words: assistant, sales assistant, doctor, reporter, police officer, waiter, bank clerk, star, thief, nurse, money, station, magazine, dinner, dangerous, afraid, late
Phrases: get … from, work for, work hard, call at, school play, evening newspaper, be afraid of
E. Grammar language:
Special questions
F. Learning strategies:
Learn other’s job
G. Interdiscipinary:
Social and communication.
H. Emotion and manner:
Teaching time: 6 periods
Teaching procedures:
Period One (pp19-20)
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary: sales assistant. Doctor. Actor. Reporter. Police. Officer. Waiter. Bank clerk. student
2. Master and use: What do you do? What does he do? Does he work in hospital?
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary
2. language: What does she do? She is a doctor.
难点Use the language to ask for the jobs
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体运用
Step 1
Organization 1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step2
Ree talk 2’ Talk about the weather and weeks. The student talk about something.
Step 3
Presentation
15’ 1. Ask students to look at the picture and remember what they can see
2. Find four groups to say the words that they remember. (教师板书，学生说出)
3. Talk about the picture then make a dialogue.
Such as: What is this? It’s a store. What can you see? I can see a sweater. What color is t? It’s green. How much is it? It’s 50 dollars
4. Ask students: What is your father? He is a worker. (Tell them another way of saying:
What does your father do?板书）出示一张人物以及职业的图片，问学生：
Is he a worker? No, he isn’t. What is he? He is a doctor. 或问：What does he do?
然后以同桌之间一问一答的形式来练习：
Such as: A: What does he do?
B: He is a reporter.
5. Listen to the tape: 1b. 2a. ab.
Listen and number the people (1-3) in the picture above. Listen carefully three times. Point out the picture in activity 2a. Ask who each person is, say, Now work with your partner. Ask and answer questions about the pictures.
Ask ss to close their books and write down the words about the things.
Ask ss to act out in pairs or groups.
Call more students to practice more.
Ask ss about jobs in pairs or groups.
多媒体放映
图一
图二
录音机
Step 4
Practice 6’ Now, practice the things we have learned.
They can talk about the jobs. Such as: What do you do?
I am a student.
What does your father do?
He is a farmer. 给学生们一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都能有机会来表演。
多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class.
Language: What does he do? What does he want to be? He is a worker. He wants to be a sales assistant. 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 text 4’ 1、Self check 让学生作后再讲解答案。 多媒体放映
Step 7 Consolidation 4’ In this class, we have learned the sentence:
What do you do? What does he do?
What does he want to be?
Talk about the jobs. Pay attention to the usage of “want” or “wants” 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework(1’) Practice The dialogue according to the picture on Page 1. 让学生写出五个询问对方职业的句子。
Period Two (p21)
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体运用
Step 1
Organization Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Talk about the family and the jobs, Such as; My father is a worker, And He works in a hospital The student talk freely
Step 3
Presentation 3’
1. Ask students to make some sentences with these words; waiter. Bank clerk. Reporter. Nurse. Police officer.
2. Look at the picture and match the jobs with the people in the pictures. Such as; I see a lot of money every day. But it’s not mine. I count it for other people match the bank clerk.
3. Let the students practice more and more.
4. They make a conversation to proc-tise the drills.
For example: What do you do?
I help doctors and patients. Some people call us “angels in white”, Can you guess what I do?
5. Pairwork: Practise the conversation on the right. Use the jobs and places in activity 3a.
Where does your sister work? She works at a hospital.
What does your sister work? She works at a hospital.
What does she do? She’s a doctor.
6. Game: Guess the game!
Draw a picture of someone at work.
Can your classmates guess the job?
Just like: Is he a police officer?
No, he isn’t? Is he a waiter?
Yes, he is 1. 叫学生口头造句，用一些有关职业的句子。争取大部分的同学都有回答的机会，多次重复加大练习。
2. 教师边让学生读句子边解释这些句子的意思。
3. 教师边让学生读句子，做到熟练掌握。
4. 采用游戏的形式，让尽可能多同学参与。
5．继续练习这个句式。能让学生自己造句。
多媒体放映
图一
图二
出示单词卡片
录音机
Step 4
Practice(6’) Now, practice the things we have learned.
They can talk about the jobs. Such as: What do you do?
Where does he work?
He is a doctor. He works in a hospital.
Is he a police officer? Yes, he is.
No, he isn’t 给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都能有机会来表演 多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class
Language: What does he do? What does he want to be? He is a worker.
He wants to be a sales assistant.
Where does he work?
He words in a hospital.
Is she a nurse? Yes, she is. 以提问的形式来进行总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会
Step 6
Test 4’ 1、Self check(见后面) 让学生作后在讲解答案 多媒体放映
Step 7
Consolidation 4’ In this class, we have learned the sentence:
Where does he work? He works in a factory.
A bank clerk: I see a lot of money every day. But it’s not mine. I count it for other people.
Talk about the jobs. Pay attention to the usage of “want” or “wants” 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework Pratice the dialogue according to the picture on Page 25. 让学生写出五个句子，分别询问职业和工作地点
Period Three (pp22-23)
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Oranization1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Oral practice: Games, words that describe jobs, such as exciting, dangerous, boring The students talk about freely
Step 3
Presentation 8’ 1. Let students look at the picture and guess the jobs. The teacher describes the jobs and let students guess what. Ask job does the person have? Where does the person work?
2. Then use explanations and short sample sentences to help students understand what each word means. For example, Exciting means very interesting and very fast-moving.
A police officer has an exciting job.
3. Let students practice. Such as: He is a police officer. It’s an exciting job.
4. Listen to the conversation. What jobs do Betty, Jenny, and Sam want? Then write the jobs below.
5. Listen again. Why are Betty, Jenny, and Sam interested in these jobs? Complete the chart above.
6. Listen to the tape: Listen and number the picture(1-3) below.
Then practise the dialogue.
7. Grammar focus: 1．叫学生口头造句用一些有关职业的句子。争取大部分的同学都有回答的机会，多次重复加大练习。
2. 教师边让学生读句子边解释这些句子的意思。
3. 叫学生口头练习一些有关这方面的句子。
4. 听录音，让学生填写表格，然后再纠正答案。
5. 分组练习，让学生大面积的练习。
6. 让学生朗读Gammar Focus 多媒体放映
图一
图二
出示单词卡片
录音机
Step 4
Practice 6’ 7. Read the newspaper want ads. And fill in the blanks with the correct jobs.
One: Wanted: Do you like to work late? Do you like to work hard? Do you like to meet people? If your answer is “Yes”, then we have a job for you as a …… 给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都有机会来表演。
多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Words and phrases of this class Language:
本节课主要是听录音来完成各种对话，充分让学生学会职业的文法以及地点的表达法。 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 test 4’ 1、Self check(见后面) 让学生做后再讲解答案 多媒体放映
Step 7 Consolidation 4’ 在这节课例我们主要听录音然后回答问题，让学生充分练习听力，达到会听、会说然后在自己编对话来练习。 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework Read the newspaper more and more. 让学生朗读3A部分的内容。
Period Four (P24)
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization 1’ Organize students to prepare for the class
Step 2
Free talk 2’ Oral composition: My parents.
Such as: I have a very happy family.
My father is a worker. He works in a factory. My mother is a nurse. She works in a hospital. 学生口头作文，让他们把学到的知识系统地用到自己的作文中来。练习关于职业以及工作地点的表达。
Step 3
Presentation
1. Let the students hurry to read the words they can’t remember.
2. Then the teacher guid the students to go over the words. See how the students have grasped.
3. Ask students to write five new words in their Vocab-builder.
4. Practise: I magine you want one of the jobs at BFS. Write and explain why your are good person for the job.
They don’t have to use real information about themselves-they can imagine that they have the skills needed to do one of the jobs. Remind them that they have to show why they are good for the job.
5. Go over the whole unit, first the words and useful expressions.
Then go over the frills: What do you do? What does he do?
Where does he work? He works in a factory. 1. 学生自测，看看他们急得如何。
2. 在让学生写五个生词填在单词表上。
3. 找工作：以小组为单位讨论。个人介绍推销自己。
4．总复习时，领着学生复习全部单词，争取让每一个学生都能来掌握。 多媒体放映
图一
图二
出示单词卡片
录音机
Step 4
Practice 6’ Now, practice the things we have learned.
They can talk about the jobs. Such as: What do you do?
Where does he work?
He is a doctor. He works in a hospital.
Is he a police officer? Yes, he is.
No, he isn’t
给学生一定的时间，让他们充分练习。学生小组讨论和练习。让大部分的同学都有机会来表演。 多媒体放映
Step 5
Summary 2’ Game: How to find a good job? Discuss and make a dialogue. 以提问的形式来进行复习总结，在让学生有一个巩固的机会。
Step 6 test 4’ 1. Self check(见后面)
In this class, we have learned self- 多媒体放映
Step 7
Consolidation
(4’) Check, then go over the whole unit. I think most of the students have grasped them very well. 让学生写一篇作文。 大屏幕显示
Step 8
Homework 1’ Especially the jobs and the places.
Compostion: How to find a good job?
Period Five
Testing (Weekly paper and Nan’an paper)
Note:
七年级新目标英语教案【篇5】
Unit 10 Can you play the guitar?
一．教学目标：
1． 教会学生表达做某事的能力。
2． 谈论自己的爱好和意愿。
3． 学会表达自己对于各种协会的选择。
4． 会写简单的招聘广告，会使用简单的求职对话。
二．语言目标：
1． 会使用can.表示能力。
2． 会谈论喜好和意愿。
三．学习策略：
角色扮演。通过谈论彼此的特长与爱好培养一种群体意识。
四．跨学科学习：
音乐：熟悉各种乐器。
社会实践：参加各种团体活动。
五．课时安排：五课时
1．P59-p60.2b
2．P60.2c-p61
3．P62-63
4．P64
5. 测试
六．教学步骤：
Period 1
1. T: We can do lots of things. I can sing. I can dance. What can you do? Can you sing /dance /swim /paint /speak English/play chess…?
S: Yes, I can. /No, I can’t.
Teach the words: sing, dance, swim, paint, speak, chess, guitar.
S1: I can sing. Can you sing?
S2: Yes, I can. Can you dance? (to S3)
S3: No, I can’t. Can you …? (to S4)
…
2. Teach: club. Yao Xia is in Guo An Football Club. Football players are always in football clubs. They can join a football club they like. We can join a club we like. We have many clubs.
I like singings. So I want to join the music club. What club do you want to join?
S: I want to join the … club.
T: Can you …?
S: Yes, I can. /No, I can’t.
3. Do 1a.
4. Do 1b. Listen and number the conversations
5. Pairwork: Let them pratice the conversations: I want to join … Can you…?
6. Do 2a.
7. Do 2b.
Task 1: I want to know what your favorite clubs are. Groupwork.
Name Clubs want to join can
Eli Music club Play the guitar
Homework:
Recite the new words.
Write a small composition about what they like and they can.
Period 2
1.Revision. Do you like…? Does she like…? Can you…? Can he…? What club do you want to join?
2. Talk about their homework. Let them read their composition.
3. Review the grammar box. Ask students to say the questions, answers and statements. Let them observe: can’t = cannot.
4. Do 3a. Read the four lines to students. Then put this conversation in order.
5. Do 3b. You will talk to three students. Ask each what he or she can do. Write it on a piece of paper. Later you will tell the class about these three students.
Ask what can you do?
6. Task: Build their clubs and write the ad in the poster.
Period 3.
1.T:What can you do?
S: I can…
T: Can you play chess?
S: Yes…
Teach the new words of music instruments.
2. Section B. Do 1a.
3. Task 1: Talent show. Let them play the different music instruments or do other things.
name act
4. Listen and do 2a and 2b.
5. 2c. Ask two students to read the conversation to the class.
Students pairs do.
6. 3a. Ask a student to read it to the class. Underline the things.
7. 3b. Complete the poster with the words.
8. Task 2: Write your own poster for a sports day. Ask some students to read their ads to the class.
Period 4
1.Task 1: Ask a student to draw an music instrument, then let other students to talk about them and write down the words.
2. Task 2Write five things about yourself on a piece of paper. Another student will read to the class. The other students will guess who you are.
3. Self check. Do 1 and 2.
4.Task 3. You are in charge of a music club. The others want to join it. Please prepare the interviewing questions and act.
5. Task 4. I can do!
Encourage the students to say their hobbies and what they can do. Let them write it down.
Period 5
Do Weekly paper or Nan’an paper
七年级新目标英语教案【篇6】
新目标英语人教版七年级下册英语教学计划范例
一、教材分析
本学期的主要内容为PEP小学英语六年级下册，共有4个教学单元、2个复习单元。每单元分“A、B、C”三个部分，共12页，复习单元为6页。全书配有彩色卡通式插图，设计新颖活泼，生动有趣。本教材的设计与编写体现了对传统外语教学思想的继承和发展，在比较、分析和研究多种国内外小学英语教材的基础上，博采众长，取其精华，形成了本套教材特有的编写体系。本套教材的编写思路是以话题为纲，以交际功能和语言结构为主线，逐步引导学生运用英语完成有实际意义的语言任务，即：话题－功能－结构－任务。根据学生的实际情况，教师可以有选择地、灵活地安排教学内容，有针对性地设计课堂教学活动。
二、学生分析
六年级的学生对英语学习兴趣整体有所下降，两极分化比较严重。所以本学期应做好后进生的转化工作。教师应该面向全体学生，以学生的发展为宗旨，始终把激发学生的学习兴趣放在首位，注意分层教学，引导学生端正学习态度，掌握良好的学习方法，培养学生良好的学习习惯。
三、教学目标
1、能按四会、三会的要求掌握所学单词。
2、能按四会要求掌握所学句型。
3、能使用日常交际用语，活用四会句型，进行简单的交流，做到大胆开口，发音正确。
4、能在图片、手势、情境等非语言提示的帮助下，听懂清晰的话语和录音。
5、进一步养成良好的书写习惯。
6、进一步养成听英语、读英语和说英语的良好习惯。
7、能运用相关的语言知识和技能，完成某项任务。
四、主要教学措施
1、以活动为课堂教学的主要形式，设计丰富多彩的教学活动，让学生在乐中学、学中用，从而保证学生英语学习的可持续性发展。
2、通过听、说、读、写、唱、游、演、画、做等形式，进行大量的语言操练和练习。
3、培养学生拼读音标的能力，确保学生自主学习的质量。
4、设计全面、高效的课外作业，培养学生良好的书写习惯，做到整洁、规范、正确地书写。
5.对优秀学生尽量的多提高自身素质，多看英语读物，多落知识点。对差生则多利用课堂，课外的时间抓基础知识，纠正个别同学的发音。努力提高学生学习英语的积极性。争取全班统一进步。
五、教学进度安排
由于本学年教学时间相对较短，所以教学时间显得十分紧张，因此对本学年的教学作如下安排：
教材共四个单元。每单元8课，其中6节新授课，新授课部分两周完成，复习单元一周完成，计三周一个单元。书本知识共32课，不排除因为课文难，学生接受较慢而增加课时。教学中还穿插各种形式的`小测验，丰富多彩的英语活动，还有数次作业、考试的评析，同时由于放假、学生差异、教学容量、教师进修、考试等其他客观因素的影响，我将按实际需要对课时进行适当调整，力求达到最佳效果。
总而言之，这半年是六年级学习小学英语的最后半年，本学期英语教学的目的就在于要使学生爱学、乐学、善学。为中学的英语学习打下基础，同时教师充分利用“情景教学”这一重要方法扩展教学形式，培养、维持和发展学生学习英语的兴趣，提高英语教学的效果。
六、电教计划：
UNIT 1：Part A Let’s learn 运用“金太阳”光盘进行教学，让学生学习单词的标准的发音。
Part B Let’s talk 运用“金太阳”光盘进行句型的教学。
UNIT 2 ：Part A Let’s learn 运用“金太阳”光盘进行教学，让学生学习标准的发音。
Part B Let’s talk 运用“金太阳”光盘进行句型的教学，学生能进行分角色对话。
UNIT 3 ：Part A Let’s learn 运用“金太阳”光盘进行教学，让学生掌握句型标准的发音。
Part B Let’s talk 运用“金太阳”光盘进行句型的教学。
UNIT 4 ：Part A Let’s learn 运用“金太阳”光盘进行教学，让学生学习标准的发音。
Part B Let’s talk 运用“金太阳”光盘进行句型的教学。
UNIT 5 ：Part A Let’s learn 运用“金太阳”光盘进行教学，让学生学习标准的发音。
Part B Let’s talk 运用“金太阳”光盘进行句型的教学。
UNIT 6：Part A Let’s learn 运用“金太阳”光盘进行教学，让学生学习标准的发音。
Part B Let’s talk 运用“金太阳”光盘进行句型的教学。
具体进度表安排如下:
周次 日 期 内 容
1 2月19日—2月24日 Unit 1 Part A Let’s learn &Let’s do
2 2月25日—3月2日 Unit 1 Part A Let’s talk
Unit1 Part A Read and write
Unit1 Part B Let’s Learn
3 3月3日—3月9日 Unit 1 Part B Let’s talk
Unit 1 Part B Read and write
Revision and Test
4 3月10日—3月16日 Unit 2 Part A Let’s Learn &Let’s do
Unit 2 Part A Let’s talk
Unit 2 Part A Read and write
5 3月17日—3月23日 Unit 2 Part B Let’s Learn &Let’s chant
Unit 2 Part B Let’s talk
Unit 2 Part B Read and write
6 3月24日—3月30日 Revision and Test
Unit 3 Part A Let’s Learn & Let’s do
Unit 3 Part A Let’s talk
7 3月31日—4月6日 Unit 3 Part A Read and write
Unit 3 Part B Let’s learn &Let’schant
Unit 3 Part B Let’s talk
8 4月7日—4月13日 Unit 3 Part B Read and write
Revision and Test
Recycle 1
9 4月14日—4月20日 Unit 4 Part A Let’s Learn
Unit 4 Part A Let’s talk &Let’s chant
Unit 4 Part A Read and write
10 4月21日—4月27日 Unit 4 Part B Let’s Learn & Let do
Unit 4 Part B Let’s talk
Unit 4 Part B Read and write
11 4月28日—5月4日 Revision and Test国际劳动节
12 5月5日—5月11日 国际劳动节
Unit 5 Part A Let’s Learn & Let’s chant
Unit 5 Part A Let’s talk
13 5月12日—5月18日 Unit 5 Part A Read and write
Unit 5 Part B Let’s Learn & Let’s do
Unit 5 Part B Let’s talk
14 5月19日—5月25日 Unit 5 Part B Read and write
Revision and Test
Unit 6 Part A Let’s Learn & Let’s do
15 5月26日—6月1日 Unit 6 Part A Let’s talk
Unit 6 Part A Read and write
Unit 6 Part B Let Learn & Let’s chant
16 6月2日—6月8日 Unit 6 Part B Let’s talk
Unit 6 Part B Read and write
Revision and Test
17 6月9日—6月16日 Recycle 2
18 6月17日—6月22日 Revision
19 6月23日—6月29日 期末考试，学期结束工作
七年级新目标英语教案【篇7】
No. 110 Middle School of Chongqing By Cao Yi
Unit 6 Where are the jazz CDs？
单元整体说明
单元教材分析
本单元的核心内容是用英语问路及谈论爱好，因此本单元的主要交际功能项目为“asking for and giving directions”and“talking about favorites，’本单元通过在音乐节Music Festivals）上问路，让学生在问路与指路的同时，又掌握了本单元中出现的音乐名词（Names of musical styles, such as jazz, pop, country）。在Section A中的3 ,4和1a,lb,2a,2b,2c为谈论自己的爱好，学生可当堂表演。
单元知识结构
词汇
名词：jazz, pop, country，dance, video, floor，！！section, group，singer, sound，fan，are, direction, culture, palace, hall, painting, gate
形容词: classical, traditional, amazing, awful, bad, western
副词： upstairs
词组：not bad，and so on
句型：
1 Where’s the pop music?
Go upstairs and turn right．It's next to the jazz.
2 What's your favorite kind of music, Judy?
My favorite kind of music is...
语法：
1. Where are the jazz CDs?
Go upstairs /Go straight and turn right /left．
They are between the pop and the country
2 The use of the sentences structures．
单元整体目标
1．Master the vocabulary．
2．Master and use：Where are the country CDs？
Go upstairs /Go straight and turn right /left.
They are between …and …／next to… behind …
单元教学重难点一览
重点 难点
I The vocabulary．
2 The Grammar． 1 Asking for and giving directions.
2 Talking about favorite.
单元学情分析
本单元与前几个单元的学习自然衔接，继续学习询问和指点方向，而且与学生愿意接触的“音乐“有关，很大程度上能调动学生的学习积极性。
单元教学建议
听、说、读、写全面训练，在说写的基础上，充分借助听力材料和补充阅读材料，训练学生的听力阅读水平。
a口语训练：本单元的口语活动主要是询问和指点方向及谈论爱好，教学时可以将学生分组设置情景〔例如问学校里的某个地方，最喜欢的歌等）展开训练。
b阅读训练：教师要求学生在阅读完SelfCheck中的3后，除了可以在地图上找出正确的地点外，还要培养学生猜测个别生词词义的能力。
c写的训练：写是检查学生英语水平的重要手段，写的训练要在听、说、读训练的基础上进行，任务型的写的训练有助于培养学生综合运用英语解决实际问题的能力。设计如“目标调查”这样的练习，把听、说、读与写的训练结合起来。
第一步，要求学生写几句话，谈谈他们喜欢的歌曲类型，歌手及歌曲。例如：
My favorite kind of music is country, and The Smith Family is my favorite group …
第二步，小组活动。
1提问：一个学生向另一个学生提问，了解对方的爱好。例如：
A：What’s your favorite kind of music?
B：My favorite kind of music is country.
A：Who’s your favorite country group?
B：My favorite group is The Smith Family.
A：……
2朗读：学生朗读自己的爱好。
单元课时分配
本单元4课时：
Section A（一）1课时
Section A（二）1课时
Section B（一）1课时
Section B（二）1课时
Section A（一）
教学内容
Section A中la．lb．lc．2a．2b．2c Grammar focus
教学目标
知识与能力
1、Match the vocabulary: jazz，classical，dance, pop，country, upstairs，video，floor, section,
2、Master and use：Where’s the jazz music？
Go straight /upstairs and turn left／right．It' s next to…／behind... /between…and…
过程与方法
学生在前几个单元已经学会了询问和指点方向，能自然地与本课知识相连接。通过“Where’s the jazz music?”引入创设情景，引起学生的兴趣。并借助媒体来调动学生的积极性。
情感态度价值观
明确相关音乐分类的英文表达法，巩固方位感的表达方式。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1、The vocabulary
2、language points:
Where’s the jazz music?
Go straight /upstairs and turn left /right. It’s next to … / behind …/between…and …
难点
1 Asking for and giving directions
2 Kind- of music
教学突破
1对于本课的单词短语通过卡片、实物来强化记忆。
2 Language points的学习，借助于Where is……？的练习和课件的图画来使其形象化。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件、光碟
学生准备
1、预习生词和课文。
2、带自己最喜欢的光碟或歌曲带。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师时间 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization (1’) Organize Ss by greeting each other. Greetings
Step 2
Free talk (2’) Ask the student
1. “who is on duty?”
If there’s a student who doesn’t come, then ask.
2. “Is everyone here?”
3. “Where is he/she?”
4. “Why he/she isn’t here today?” The student who is on duty answer.
Step
Presentation 20’ 1. Ask eight Ss to come to the front of the room and stand in two rows, leaving a few feet between Ss. Let the other Ss ask and answer questions about “Where is …? “He is between…and…”
“Where is…?” “She is behind…?/next to…”
2. Tell the Ss “Do as I told you”.(point to a student) “Wang Ming, go straight/go ahead, and then turn left, then turn right.” Let the Ss follow the directions. 学生模仿练习(impairs)
并表演
“Where is …” “He is between … and …”
“Where is …”
“She is behind …/ next to …
学生模仿表演(in pairs)
A student do as the other student told him/her.
go straight/go ahead, and then turn left, then turn right.”
3. Let the Ss practice in pairs using the CDs they have brought.
Such as one student ask “Which kind of music do you like best?”
Let the other Ss answer.
“Jazz or Country or Dance or pop or classical music.”
4. Let the Ss look at the Section A (la)
Ask the Ss to tell what they see.
Guide Ss to understand that the pictures shows different types of music. (Point: teach the new word “upstairs” with a picture.
At the same time, can teach “downstairs”)
5. Ask Ss to match each picture with one of the words on the left. Say “Write the letter of each picture. next to the words on the left”. Point out the sample answer.
Check the answer. (Answers: 1b, 2c, 3d, 4e, 5a)
6. (For 1b) Draw a set of stairs on the board. At the top of the stairs, write “jazz” in a box at the eight.
Write the three conversations on the Bb, then read it as you use your fingers to “walk” up the stairs and turn left to the “jazz” section. Then ask various Ss to come to the front of the Bb to read the other conversations, at the same time, use their fingers to walk to each section mentioned.
Play the recording the first time.
Play the recording the second time. This time, ask the Ss to listen to the recording and write the number of each conversation in the correct box. Point out the Sample answer.
Correct the answers.
(Answers: From left to right: 3, 2, 1)
7. (1c, Pair work)
Point to the conversations in 1b and ask Ss to read after you.
Use the stairs you drew on the board earlier. Erase the words you wrote before and write in the words “country” and “pop” to the left of the stairs, “dance” straight ahead of the stairs and “jazz” and “classical” to the right of the stairs.
8 (For 2a)
Ask four Ss to come to the front of the classroom. Arrange the Ss so that one is in the middle and the others are to the left of, to the right of, and behind the first student. Then describe the location of the Ss using the words “behind, next to and between”. For example, “Li Peng is behind Zhou Wen. Cao Ying is next Zhou Wen is between Cao Ying and Cong Zheng.”
Letn the Ss look at the pictures. Ask Ss to tell what they see in each picture.
Ask Ss to match each numbered sentence with one of the pictures. Say “Write the letter of each picture next to the correct sentence.
Check the answers. 小组表演
One student ask “Which kind of music do you like best?” Let the other Ss answer “Jazz or Country or Dance or pop or classical music”
到黑板前表演，并用手指按照所说的指引方向。
“Where’s the dance music?”
“Go straight and turn left.”
“Where’s the classical music?”
“Go upstairs and turn right.”
Ss listen to the tape carefully
Ask Ss to match each numbered sentence with one of the pictures 多媒体放映图一
录音机
(The answers are 1a, 2c, 3b)
9 (For 2b)
First, tell the Ss that suppose they are clerks of a music store, if someone asks them the directions, what they should do?
Notices
注意CDs和 videos 中的s 发的[z] 解说在以元音或浊辅音([z], [v], [dv]除外)结尾的名词后读[z]。
例如：play [pleiz], doogs [z].
10 Ask Ss to work in pairs. Suppose one student is a clerk of a music store, the other is asking him/her for different kinds of CDs, show her the Ss listen to the tape carefully and label the map of the CD store Ss write them down
分角色扮演
directions by looking.
At the map at Page 36, 2b.
Step 4
Practice (6’) Pairwork
Practice the conversations by looking at the screen and pictures on the Bb, ask and answer questions about other places in the pictures. Ss practice the dialogue in pairs “Where’s the pop music?” “It’s …” 多媒体放映 2a, 2b
Step 5
Just for fun (5’) 1. Ask all Ss to read the conversation. Have Ss identify the two characters in the cartoon.
2. Ask pairs of Ss to present the dialogue to the rest of the class.
3. Ask Ss to play both roles.
Work in pairs
Step6
Summary (2) 1. Summary the language points of this lesson.
2. Words and phrases of this class.
3. Language points.
Step 7
Test (4’) 同“练习设计 Do it by themselves.
Step 8
Consolidtion (4’) 1. Let’s Ss keep the Grammar Focus in their hearts.
2. Ss practice the Grammar Focus in pairs by looking at the pictures on the Bb.
Practice in pairs.
Homework (1’) Practice the dialogues according to the pictures on Page 35 and 36
本课小结
本节课学习了10个生词，和？句式的练习运用及学习了。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练的用英语询问和指点方向，也能用英语说出不同类型的音乐。
问题探究与拓展活动
本节课主要学习问路、指路和各种类型的音乐。学生掌握后，可以问学生如果别人问路而他不知道时该如何办？本课的拓展活动为Shelf - Check中的Just for fun,同时增进本课所学。如：
When’s the pop music／dance music?
Where are the country CDs／jazz CDs?
I don’t know! You don't? No, I don’t. I don't work here.
练习设计
随堂练习设计
按要求做题
downstairs（反义词） videos,
将下列词组翻译成英语。
在…的旁边 在…和…之间 上楼 下楼
一直往前走 向右转 爵士音乐 古典音乐
个性练习设计
翻译下列句子：
1、流行乐在哪里？上楼后向右转。在舞曲的旁边
2、舞曲在哪里？上楼后一直往前走。它在流行乐和乡村乐的旁边。
3. 乡村乐碟在哪里？他们在舞曲碟的旁边
4. 爵士乐碟在哪里？它们在乡村乐的旁边。
板书设计
Unit 6 Where um the jam CDs？
1, Where’s the pop music? go straight
Go upstairs and turn right. go upstairs-go downstairs
It’s next to the dance music. pop music
2,Where are the country CDs? Between …and …
They are behind the jazz CDs．turn right／left
Section A（二）
教学内容
Section A中3,4以及Self check中1,2两部分
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary : group, singer
2. Master and use：What’s yaw favorite kind of music？
My favorite kind of music is country．
过程与方法
通过“What’s Bob’s favorite kind of music?”引入创设情景，引起学生的兴趣。并借助多媒体来提高学生的主动性，让其大量练习。
情感态度价值观
在上节课的基础上，对于音乐分类的表达和指点位置更加熟练，运用自如。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary．
2. language points: What's your favorite kind of music？
My favorite kind of music is country．
Who's your favorite group?
My favorite group is The Smith Family．
难点
The language points
教学突破
在摹仿的基础上逐渐能用单词替换的方式熟记表达法。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件、光碟
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
将自己最喜欢的歌手或乐队列出，并将其歌曲分类。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization(1’) Organize Ss by greeting each other.
Step 2
Free talk (2’) Ask the students
1. “Who is on duty?”
If there’s a student who doesn’t come, then ask
2. “Is everyone here?”
3. “Where is he /she?”
4. “Why he/she isn’t here today?” Answer.
Step 3
Revision (5’) 1. Draw a set of stairs on the Bb, at the top of the stairs, write “dance” in a box, and “pop” in a box in its right, and “country” on its left, behind the pop box write “jazz”, and behind the country box write “classical”
2. 2. Let the Ss works in pairs, practice the dialogues by looking at the picture. Ss work in pairs
1. “Where’s the pop music?” “Go upstairs and turn right. It’s next to the dance music.”
2. “Where’s the jazz music?” “Go straight and turn left. It’s …
3. …4. …
Step 4
Presentation (15’) 1.处是些听风的一张图片，问学生 “Who is he?”
Let the Ss answer. Then say: “Yes, you’re right, he is xie tingfeng.”
Ask a student “What is he? /What does he do?” (student can answer in Chinese.)
“Yes, he is a singer.” Teach the word ‘singer’.(sing-singer)
2. 让学生无人一组谈论
“Who is your favorite singer?”
“Who is your favorite group?”
“What’s your favorite kind of music?”
Let the Ss write their answers in the chart on the book (SectionA, 4)
3. Ask a student the other four’s favorite singer/goup/kind of music. eg, ask Wang Ping:
“Who is Li Ming’s favorite singer/group?”
“What’s Li Ming’s favorite kind of music?”
4. Let the Ss work in pairs. Ask the other three Ss in their group their favorite singer/group/kind of music.
5. Let a student describe the musical tasts of the other Ss in thir groups. Such as: Liu Fang’s favorite kind of music is dance, and his favorite singer is Sun Yue.
6. Tell the Ss “If I’m student A, if I want to know what Bob’s favorite kind of music is, what should I ask?” “Yes, I should ask ‘What’s favorite kind of music?’”
7. Ask the pairs to continue on their own.
Move around the room monitoring the progress of the pairs.
8. Go over the answers.
The answer are:
Bob: classical The Boston Orchestra
Carla: jazz Boys from Brzil
Mary: dance Patsy Street
Joe: country The Smith Family
Ss answer: ‘He is Xie Tingfeng.”
Answer my question in Chinese or English
Ss work in group of
five.
“Who is your favorite singer?”
“Who is your favorite group?”
“What’s your favorite kind of music?”
Ask the other’s favorite singer/group/kind of music Work in groups.
Ss describe the musical tastes of the other Ss in their group.
Ss listen carefully
Work in pairs
Student A in each pair look at the chart on Page 37. Student B look at e the chart on Page92
Ask and answer
“What’s Bob’s/Carla’s/Mary’s/Joe’s favorite kind of music?” and so on. 多媒体放映
Step5
Consolidation（6’） Give Ss five minutes to consolidate the language points by practicing the dialogues which this class have learned in pairs. Work in pairs.
Step 6
Summary
(2’) Summa the language points of this lesson.
Show the teaching aims. Ss read after the teacher. 多媒体放映
Step 7
Test(8’) Self Check1, 2.
Ask Ss to check all the words they know.
Ask Ss to find out the meaning of any words they don’t know. They can do this by reviewing to unit, asking the teacher, asking their classmates, or using dictionaries.
Ask Ss to write five new words in their Vocabulary on Page 106.
After Ss to have recorded their new words, ask to have recorded their new words, ask them to share their lists with other Ss.
2. 同练习设计 Check all the words they know.
Find out the meaning of any words they don’t know.
Work in groups.
Homework
(1’) 1 Practice the dialogue in pairs after class.
“What ‘s your favorite kind of music?”
“Who’s your favorite singer/group?”
2 预习Section B 中的1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 2c.
本课小结
本节学习了2个生词和What's your favorite kind of music？及Who's Bob's favorit group/singer句式的练习和运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练地用英语谈论自〔喜欢的歌词和乐队。
教学探讨与反思
教师通过展示明星卡片，来引起学生的兴趣，通过对自己喜欢的歌手和乐队的谈论，（例如小组谈论”Who is your favorite singer？’’“Who is your favorite group？’
“What's your favorite kind of music？’），引导学生联系实际，谈论一下当前国内－些较为流行的音乐，歌手及乐队等．
练习设计
(A类学生全做，B类学生只做1)
1按要求变换下列句子。
(1) My favorite kind of music is country.（划线提问）
(2) Bob’s favorite group is the Smith Family．（划线提问）
(3 ) My mother's favorite singer is Cheng Long.（划线提问）
2在横线上填上适当的介词
(1) Please look ______this page．
(2) Work ______small groups. Ask your classmates ______ their favorite groups or singers.
(3) Where's the pop music？It's next ________ the dance music．
(4) What's your favorite kind ______ music?
板书设计
Unit 6 Where are the jazz CDs
1 What’s Bob’s favorite kind of music? sing-singer
His favorite kind of music is … in small groups
2. Who’s Carla’s favorite group? Look at
Her favorite group is …
教学内容
Section B中1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 2c
教学目标
知识能力
1. Master the vocabulary: amazing awful bad Latin sound
2. Can talk about singers or musical groups
过程与方法
学生在本单元Section A中已学过不同风格的音乐如;jazz music, dance music, classical music等，已具备了学习本课的初步知识，课前通过放不同风格的乐曲录音来导人新课，让学生通过听录音后的感受，来谈论他们喜欢的歌手或乐队。
情感态度价值观
教育学生学会欣赏不同风格的音乐，陶冶他们的情操。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1 The vocabulary
2 Language：Talk about singer or musical groups
难点
Talk about singers or musical groups
教学突破
1. 本课学习的单词主要是一些表示感情色彩的形容词，可通过丰富的表情演示来学习
2. Language放音乐录音，让学生边听边谈
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带(不同风格的音乐磁带)课件
学生准备
预习生词，收集自己喜欢的歌手或乐队的资料
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step l
Organization
（1’） Organize Ss by greeting each other
Step 2
Free talk(2}） Ask the student:
1 “Who is on duty?”
2 “What’s your favorite kind of music?”
3“Who’s your favorite singer/ group?” The student talk about something
Step3
Presentation
（15'） la:
1．Focus attention on the three faces：
Guide students to understand the meanings of the three faces: the snide face means“I like it”．The middle face with no smile means “I don’t like it or dislike it“. The frown face means ”I don’t like it“ 读单词并根据单词意思做出不同的表情
2．Then call attention to the list of words. Say each one and ask student's to repeat then talk about what it means．
（借助面部表情及声音来解释单词并让学生根据不同的单词做出不同的表情）
3．Ask students to draw the correct face on the line to each word． Draw the correct face
on the line．
1b：
1．Play a piece of dance music let students listen then ask them：Do you like the dance music?
Guide the students to answer:
”Yes，I do. It’s awful．” Then play another type of music, such as classical, jazz, country and so on
2．Ask each student to make a list of three singers or musical groups then ask them to work on pairs：
A: Do you like the Latin Sound?
B：No，I don’t．They’re awful．
C：Do you like?
D: Yes，I do．No, I don’t.
2a:
1．Let the Ss look at the chart and the pictures of the four students，tell them they will listen to recording of these four persons．Write the name
of each person’s favorite kind of music/favorite groups/singer and Description word in the blank under their photo，Then play the recording the first time, Ss only listen
2. Play the recording again．This time students listen and write their answers in the chart． Listen the music and
answer the question．
Make a list
Work in pairs
Do you like?
Yes …
No, ….
Listen to the cording
Listen and write.
Look at the chart．
Listen and complete
the chart．
2b Play the
tape
录音机
录音机
1. let Ss look at the chart on the right, tell them that we will listen the recording again. listen and complete the chart.
2. Play the tape，students write the favorite group or singer and the description words in the chart．
Step 4
Practice
(5’） 2c:
Tell the students: This activity we will work in pain，you are Mike and your deskmate is Judy. Have a conversation about music like 2b. Talk about the music in pairs
Step 5
Summary
(2'） 1．Words and phrases of this class
2. Language points talk about singers and musical groups. Talk about the music in pairs
Step 6
Consolidation
(8'） Show the pictures of Tian Zhen, Na Ying.，Sun Nan，Beyound group，Yuquan and play their music,
let the students talk about them. Look, listen and talk 课件
（二）
Step 7
Homework(1’） 1．预习Section B中句3a,3b,3c
2画张学校的平面图
本课小结
本节课学习了5个生词和Do you like? What's your favorite句式的练习和运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能更加熟练地用英语谈论自己喜欢的歌词和乐队。
教学探讨与反思
通过对国外某些歌手和乐队（Who’s your favorite singer/group？What’s your favorite kind of music?）的谈论，引导学生联系实际，谈论一下当前国内一些较为流行的音乐，歌手及乐队等．
练习设计
（见课件Test）
板书设计
Unit 6. Where are the jazz CDs?
1 amazing, awful，bad， 3 Do you like The Latin
great sound，terrible， No，I don’t．They’re awful /fantastic
2 What' your favorite... 4 Do you like Livinia Casey？
My favorite…is… Yes，I do．She's cool．
Section B（二）
教学内容
Section B中3a，3b，3c，4和Self Check中3．
教学目标
知识与能力
1. The words（three skills）: direction，culture, palace, area，western，eastern，hall，traditional，and，painting, by, and so on，gate
2. Master: How to give directions to the places that people ask you.
过程与方法
学生在第一课时就已经学会指引方向，已具备了学习本课的知识，这是第一课时的进一步学习。通过询问学生其学校所在地来引人创设情景，让学生有身临其境之感。需大量练习口头表达，同时提高学生的英语阅读能力。
情感态度价值观
正确表达各种情绪：
喜欢，不喜欢等等。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1 The vocabulary
2 How to give directions
难点
How to give directions．
教学突破
1、对于生词学生只要会读、说、听就可以了，学生通过查阅字典或问老师或问同伴来自己解决，提高学生的自学能力。
2、对于方向的指引，通过大量的练习和课件的图画来突破解决。
教学准备
教师准备
课件
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization
（1’） Organize Ss by greeting each other.
Step 2
Free talk
(2'） Ask the students：
1．“Who is on duty?”
2．“What's your favorite kind of music?”
3． “Who’s your favorite singer / group？” Students answer my questions
Step3
Presentation
（15’） 1．“Now，pop music fans，listen carefully，if you，here”．（Start with a circle and label it．“You are here“）
Read the first set of instructions，draw a map of the pop store．
For example，when you read the words “Go straight’，draw an arrow straight up.
When you read the words “Turn left at the classical music’，
draw a box and label it‘classical music’，Then continue your first arrow around this box to the left．
Let Ss draw a map on the exercises books．
At the same time，let the other Ss look at the country music section, draw a map．in groups of four.
Let Ss work in groups of four，check the accuracy of the map by reading the instructions as their fingers through the map．
2．（3b），First，let the Ss look at the Big Sound music store map Point to each section of the store and ask Ss to read all the labels on the drawing.
Then ask Ss to fill in the missing words by themselves．
（As Ss work，the teacher can move around the room monitoring progress and answering any questions they may have．）The third，ask the Ss to check each other' s
won，and the teacher check the answers Pop music fans draw a map on their Exs books．
Draw maps
Ss work in groups of four．
Ss use their fingers to trace the path．
to the classical music section． 多媒体
投影地
图
3，Let the Ss write directions to the jazz/dance/country/pop sections. They can use the same kind of sentences.（As Ss work，the teacher can move around the mom monitoring progress and answering any questions they may have．）Ask Ss to check each other's work．Then
check the answers． Write directions 多媒体
投影地
图多媒
体投影
Step 4
Practice
(7’） From each group to be the first to give directions to be a location somewhere in the school．Tell the students that the first student to correctly guess the answer takes the next turn．
Self check(3a)
1．Let the students read the article by themselves．Find out the words that don't know list it. They can learn them by looking them up the directions or asking the teacher or the classmates or looking at the books．
2．Let the students read the words they don’t know after the teacher. Summa, the language points of this unit．
（见小结）
见练习设计。 Work in groups
Ss do the activity 多媒体
投影学
校平面
图
本课小结
本节课还是主要练习了问路与指路，同时在selfcheck中接触到了一些生词，学生只要做到会听、说就可以了。
问题探究与拓展活动
本节课中，可以让学生在知道west一western，east ---eastern的同时，自己找出表示方向的名词转换为形容词时在其后面直接加ern就可以了。（例如south一southern, north一northern, southeast一southeastern northeast一northeastern，…等等。）并出训练题，如个性练习。
练习设计
随堂练习设计
用适当的介词填空：
1．Direction _____ the Country Music section.
2．Turn left _____ the classical music
3．Pop music is _____ jazz and dance.
4．Look _____ the Big Sound music store map．Then fill ______ the blanks．
5．The classical music is next ______ the country music．
6. Welcome ________ the Culture Palace．
7．You can listen _______ classical music ______ Area E．
8．There you can see the traditional paintings ______ Qi Baishi．
个性练习设计
用所给词的适当形式填空。
1．We have a _______ (west) section，the left，and on ______ （east)section on the right．
2．a _______ （northeast）wind（东北风）
A _________（southeast）wind（东南风）
3．the _______ States of the U.S.A.（south)（美国南部各州）
4．The _______ （north)States of the U.S.A
注：解说表示方向的n.＋ern就成了形容词
板书设计
Unit 6．Where are the jazz CDs?
Go straight west一western
Turn left at the east一eastern
pop section. south一southern
The classical music is north一northern
next to the country southeast一southeastern
music northwest一northwestern
教学探讨与反思
在本单元的教学中，多数学生能按照老师的要求掌握好大纲的内容，而且本单元的内容与学生的生活息息相关，在现实生活中经常遇到，也经常谈论。通过小组练习、讨论，练习“Where’s the jazz music？” “It's …”. ”What’s your favorite kind of music？”“It’s …” “Who's your favorite singer？……多数学生掌握得相当好。但是学生的自主学习能力尚待提高。
七年级新目标英语教案【篇8】
一．教学目标：本单元主要学习日期的表达方式。通过围绕生日进行互相问答式的讨论，掌握英语表达年、月、日的单词和句型，能够熟练地谈论各种有关日期的话题，询问表达年龄的句型。可以询问节日的表达法。
二．语言目标：掌握以下句型
1．When is your birthday ? My birthday is November 11th .
2．How old are you ? I’m thirteen years old .
3．What events do you have at your school ?
We have an Art Festival each year .
4.Do you have a pop concert ?Sorry ,I don’t know .
5.When is the school trip ? It’s in April .
6.When were you born ? I was born in ….
三．学习策略：
角色扮演
自我评价
四．课时安排：
课时1： p47-p48 2c
课时2: p482d-p49
课时3: p50 Section B-p51 3b
课时4: p51 (4) groupwork-p52 selfcheck
五．教学步骤：
Period One
1. Showing the students a large calendar.
Teaching the words : when , January , February , March , April , May , June , July , August , September ,October , November , December.. birthday.
2. T: When is your birthday ?
S1: My birthday is -----
T: When is his /her birthday ?
S2: His /Her birthday is ----
Teaching : first , second , third , fourth , fifth , sixth , seventh , eighth , ninth , tenth , … , twentieth , thirtieth,twenty-first -----
3. Training the ordinal numbers together .
4. Listening to the tape recorder of 1a . The students try to remember the words of the months .
5. Listening to 2b conversations and number them 1-3.
6. Pairwork : Practise the conversations “When is your/his /her birthday ?” “…”
7. 2a. Listen to the recorder several times and repeat them.
8. Ss try to find the rule of the ordinal numbers and the teacher writes them on the Bb.
9. 2b,2c : Listen and match the names , months , days.
10. Homework: Workbook , Copy new words and setences.
Period Two
1. Duty report,
Review words of the months and the ordinal numbers .
2. T: When is your birthday ?---When were you born ?
S: My birthday is …. ---I was born in /on …
3. Help the students to learn the festivals of the year .
The students discuss them while the teacher write some of them on the Bb .
4. Pairs work : Practise “ When is your birthday ? / When were you born ? ’ How old are you ?…
5. 3a : Point out the conversations and read with students , practise“How old are you ?”
Point to the three ID cards ask questions about them .
6. 3b: Pairwork
First students make their own ID cards . Then pairs ask and answer.
7. Dictate the sentences .
8. Homework : Workbook , 评价手册 ,让学生制作家人生日卡。
9. If there is time , the whole class play games about birthday , age , name one by one.
Period Three
1. Let the students say out their family members’ names, birthdays , ages ,
2. Section B
Match the pictures and the events :
1. speech contest d
2. party c
3. school trip b
4. basketball game a
Teaching new words : speech , contest , party , school trip , basketball games , event, art , festival , pop , concert , chorus , lecture , music .
3. Listen and check the events above 1.
4. 2b : Listen again , fill in Joe’s calendar
Write 2b conversation on the Bb . Point to the calendar and show the September and October dates . Students listen to the recorder several times
And fill in Joe’s calendar
5. 2c : Ask two students to read the conversation to the class .
Students pairs do .
6. 3a Pair work
Ask students to do in pairs . Look at p51 3a and p97 , complete the schedule .
7. 3b : Practise the dialogue like the model : School Days , Art Festivals , Chorus Competition , Lecture , English Party .
Yes No I don’t
Know Month Do you like it?
School Day
Art Festival
Chorus
Competition
Lecture
Music Festival
English Party
8. Ask the students in small groups .
9. Ask the students to read the lists to the class .
10. Let the students copy these in their notebook .
11. Homework .
Period Four
1. P51 4 Group work : Write five things about yourself on a piece of paper . Another student will read to the class .
2. Have the students guess who the student is .
3. Self check
1.) Students remember the words
2.) Dictate the words
4. Write the words in the vocabulary builder by the students themselves .
5. Show the pictures of the famous people . Help the students to find their names and their birthdays
6. Home work : Students writing something about themselves including their names , ages , birthdays , the school events etc. .
七年级新目标英语教案【篇9】
青铜峡第五中学 王俊霞
教材分析
1、教学内容
1)、词汇：have，soccer，ball，tennis racket，ping-pong ball，volleyball，basketball sport，bat，2)、语言结构：A、Do you have a ping-pong ball？Yes，I do。Do you have a ping-pong bat？Not，I do not。Does she/he have a pen？Yes，she/he does
2、教材的地位及其作用
本单元的教学主要内容是：学习have的一般现在时的疑问式的肯定和否定回答，该话题与学生的日常生活紧密联系在一起，容易唤起学生的学习兴趣，这对于提高学生的综合能力很有帮助，特别是说的能力。
本单元仍在继续学习一般现在时，这是一个生活中离不开的时态，也是最基本的一个时态。新课程标准要求学生重点掌握一般现在时，这在英语中使用频率很高，学好这一时态的用法对以后其他时态的学习和交际有很大的帮助。
二、学生分析
学生现有的能力与已掌握的知识：
学生在已经学过词汇：What is this ？ What is that？ 句型： Where is„? It’s in / on / under/„
经过前面的学习学生已经积累了一定的词汇，掌握了一定的目标语，已经具备了一定的听说读写能力。
三、教学目标
1、语言知识
词汇：A、重点掌握表示有关各种运动球类的名词, 如basketball, soccerball，so on 重点句型：? Do you／they have a TV? Yes，I／they do．／No，I／they don’t.Does he／she have a soccer ball? Yes，he／she does．／No，he／she doesn’t.2、语言技能
1）、能看着图片说；Do you／they have a TV? Yes，I／they do．／No，I／they don’t.Does he／she have a soccer ball? Yes，he／she does．／No，he／she doesn’t.3、学习策略
1）、利用老师所提供的图片卡片做出简单的判断。
2）、通过与同学交流，学会使用一般现在时的疑问形式及肯定和否定回答。
4、情感态度
1）通过各小组的对话练习培养学生的合作精神； 2）通过学习本单元，教会学生之间互相有无的主要句式
重点难点
1、Have 的一般现在时的疑问式用法;
2、Have的一般现在时的疑问句，及其肯定，否定回答;
3、简单拓展主语第三人称单数的句型。
教学手段：采用最简单的卡片图片、课本以及肢体语言。理念与思路、教法
1）采用图片进行直观教学。
2）学生在课堂教学过程中口头训练应成为本单元教学的重点内容。教学突破：Section A重在通过使用动词have对物品的所属进行提问和回答的交流式口语活动，学习由助动词do或does引导的一般疑问句的构成以及回答。教师要善于引导学生比较行为动词的疑问句和be动词的疑问句在构成和回答上的区别，通过大量和反复地操练以达到运用自如。
四、教学流程
一、第一教学环节：情景创设，导入新课 教师活动 学生活动
Section A主要内容是通过使用have对物品的所属进行提问和应答，来学会使用do和does引导的一般疑问句。所以在教学中可采取问答式导人法：
掌握新单词.采用各种方法学习单词。
1、升降语调、拼读、接龙和肢体的方式记忆单词。2．检查学生记忆单词的成效。
3、学生看1a的图片,使字母和单词相对应。
第二教学环节；老师和学生互动：学习掌握重要内容。
教师活动 学生活动（看图片练句型）
分片进行演示：I have a footba11．Do I have a football? 自己回答：Yes，I d0． 再问：Do I have a basketball? 自己回答：No，I don’t．再使用其它物体和图片询问学生：Do I have„? 询问学生：Do you have„? 询问学生：„? 询问学生：Do they have„? 在学生充分掌握的第一，第二人称和第三人称 的复数。
2．学生回答：Yes，you do．，you don’t．学生回答：Yes，I do．No，I don’t．学生回答：Yes，he／she does．No，he／she doesn’t．学生回答：Yes, they do．No，they don’t．掌握它的肯定和否定回答。
3、要求学生完成1b的听力，达到教学应完成的任务。
4．引导学生展开Pairwork活动，完成lc部分口语交际的教学任务，学会运用助动词do进行问答，可采用师生互动带动学生互动的交流方式：
5．Pairwork活动，完成lc部分口语交际的学习任务，学会运用助动词do进行问答并上台展示口语交际。
三、第三教学环节：合作交流，巩固提高
教师活动 学生活动
1、学生巩固练习活动，完成课堂练习和总结及笔头练习的教学任务。
2、让总结本课的 主要内容，如果不周到，教师可以补充完成。
3、游戏：让一个学生在课前 作各种动作，其他学生跟根据他的动作写单词和句型，然后核对结果。这种活动既可练习have一般疑问句的构成和回答的写法，又能调动学生的学习兴趣，十分有效。
4、习题练习，巩固课堂。问题探究与拓展活动
动词的第三人称单数形式：当句子的主语是“第三人称单数”时，即：不是I，不是you的其它单数形式时，谓语动词必须改变形式，也就是在词尾加一s或 一es(同名词的复数形式)，我们可以简称为“三单形式”。有些动词的变化是特殊的，如：have的三单形式是has。在构成否定句时。要在动词前加助动词don’t或doesn’t；在构成疑问句时，则要在主语前加上助动词do或does，does／doesn’t是do／don’t的第三人称单数形式。助动词后应该用动词的原型。
五、教学反思：（成功和不足）
本单元重点学习的语法是do 和 does 引导的一般疑问句以及它们的回答方式，与此同时学习与运动有关的一些词汇。为此，在本单元我运用不同形式鼓励学生使用目标语言，在任务中体现学生的主体地位。在过程中学生可能出现一些错误，本人就以积极的态度对待他们，愉快的氛围对学生的学习有很大的积极影响力。首先要调动学生的学习兴趣和积极性，我努力在这方面去做，不足的请各位多提宝贵意见。
教无定法，教师不要为了任务活动而忽略了语言的传授。学生的信息交流要在特定的环境中进行，给他们参与的机会。任务的完成不是语言学习的结束，而是另一个高度的开端。加强学生语言的实践是改革的关键，要给学生机会去说、去做、去思考。
新目标英语上册/Unit 1 My name's Gina 教学目标
1、学会询问周围新同学的姓名，并且将自己刚认识的好朋友介绍给全体同学。
2、通过学生制作名卡或桌卡来提高学生学习英语的兴趣，体现英语的实用性。
3、通过以上任务活动，掌握形容词性物主代词的用法及其与人称代词的主格的区别，并且在第一节课让学生对英语的学习产生兴趣。
4、德育目标：热爱班集体，团结同学。
教学重点和难点
1、形容词性物主代词的用法
2、在任务活动中掌握you和your，he和his, she和her 的用法
3、重点句型(斜体字为扩展句子)：
Hi / Hello!Good morning / afternoon / evening.How are you? Fine, thank you!/ Very well / So-so /All right.What’s your name? My name is … / I’m … What’s his/ her name? His/Her name is … 课前准备
1、学生课前准备：
利用网络查阅中英文姓名及初次见面时各国或各地风俗，礼仪体会它们的不同之处；
准备硬纸片和水彩笔；
用英文介绍自己的姓、名。
2、教学器材：录音机、电脑、图片。
3、教学课件：中英文名字展示片。
教学设计
Tasks Students’ activities Teacher’s activities
1.Game: ask and answer the question: What’s your name? Students make a self-introduction and pass the sentences one by one.At first, teacher makes a self-introduction.2.Two students act out how to greet people.Act out the greeting forms they are familiar with or they find on the students the pictures of other countries’ customs with computer.3.See who can make the most friends and get the most information.Then report their results with his or hers.Move around to make friends with the ones they are interested in.Make the students move around to make friends with others. and make their name and make their name cards in groups.Ask them to design their name cards and see which group is the best.教学过程设计
任务一：结识新朋友。
1、老师首先向学生做一个自我介绍，将名字写在黑板上: My name is …, My first name is…, My last name is …同时介绍一下名字的意义，然后学生就近组成若干小组，进行自我介绍。例如：一个学生叫徐烨，他说：My name is Xu Ye.Ye means light；一个叫王超的学生介绍说: My name is Wang Chao.Chao means Superman。这个任务能够激起学生学习英语的兴趣，同时扩大词汇量。
2、“What’s your name?”传句子比赛。学生按行分组，一个同学问，“What’s your name?”第二个学生回答，“My name is …”然后再接着问第三个人, “What’s your name?” 第三个人答，“My name is … His/ her name is …”再接着问第四个人What’s your name?”。。看哪个组最先获胜。
任务二：学生利用电脑向大家展示他们所搜集的中英文姓，问候语名及各国或各地初次见面时的礼仪，体会它们的不同之处；然后由抽签决定各组同学分别用哪个国家或哪个地区的礼仪（例如：日式、美式、法式和学校版的礼仪）来表演两个人初次见面时的问候语及谈话内容（用英文），看哪一组同学表演的形象，语言准确，最后评出最佳组合。
任务三：找朋友。并将他或她加入你的朋友记录中。该任务是通过学生自己去询问他们感兴趣的同学的爱好，找出他们之间的共同点，然后和他们交朋友（利用时间争取和所有的同学交朋友，了解他们各自的优点），并将自己所掌握的新朋友的信息介绍给全体同学，让大家了解他（们）。在该任务的执行过程当中，学生可以尽量施展他们的才能，倾尽其所学的英文知识来展示自己并且看谁能获得最多的信息。因此，这项任务在调动学生学习英语兴趣的同时，也反复操练了本单元的关键句型和形容词性物主代词，尤其是he and his, she and her；同时运用到一些超出本课教学内容的语言知识，学生参与性强，最大限度的调动了他们的积极性，同时也为学生树立了英语学习的信心。
Name Hobbies Other information
任务四：制作姓名卡。制作姓名卡，由小组协作共同完成姓名卡的设计与制作，姓名卡中要求包括学生的汉语名字（拼音书写）和英文名字，其他的内容由各组自行设计，但要求每个人的姓名卡的设计要有创意、体现小组的共性、美观大方、经久耐用、语言准确。因此，该任务既体现个性，又体现共性；既有分工，又有合作。
任务五：作业。为自己、父母、亲朋好友找一个有意义的英文名字，同时将他们介绍给你的同学们。
教学点评（或反思）
本节课的设计体现了任务型教学的特点，同时整个任务链的设计均以学生的兴趣
为主，由易至难，逐层递进，逐步完成各个任务，使学生在愉快的完成每一个任务的同时，体会到学习英语的乐趣，并使每一位学生都参与到活动中，都有所提高。本节课由于是新学期的第一节课，在教学中，本着 “新学期、新起点、新观念、新
认识”的观点设计了四个快乐的任务，同时这几个任务相互连接，环环相扣，形成了一个完整的任务链。整节课课堂气氛活跃，学生学习英语的兴趣始终很浓。尤其是“找朋友”这个任务，极大地调动了学生的积极性，学生们说出了很多精彩的句子。而在制作姓名卡时，各小组通力合作，氛围和谐，作品各具特色，体现了任务型教学中共同合作与个性张扬的优势。在解释自己名字的任务中，充分调动了学生的表现欲，学生们的名言经整理后被保留下来，提高了学生学习英语的积极性。
在各国礼仪表演中学生既学到了英文知识，又了解了其他各国各地的风俗，将知识“延伸到课堂之外的学习和生活之中”。因此，这节课中的活动具有可操作性，并以学生的生活经验和兴趣出发，使学生的思维和想象力、审美情趣得到发展，从而提高学生实际语言运用能力。
另外，本节课的德育目标，使英语教学与其他学科结合起来。
当然本节课中也存在几个需要继续探索的问题：
一、师生均是初次接触任务型教学，对其仅是好奇及尝试，尚未能领会其主旨。
二、活动中课堂秩序稍有些乱，在以后课堂中应加以指导。
教师本身也需要提高对新课标和任务型教学的认识，以完善今后的教学。
英文版英语说课稿
Good morning, everyone!Today, I’ll say something about Unit 5 Section A in Book1 of GO FOR IT English.Background on the reformation of curriculum, this book can connect the life and act, emphasize the interest and experience of the Ss, the pictures are active and vivid.Grade four is the initial stage of English learning, so it stresses on the emotion of the Ss, creates a well beginning for the Ss.This Unit has 7 parts, we’ll learn sectionA mainly, it embodies the repeating characterize.Review the learned language points “Where’s„”and the new language points will be represented in the following units.So this unit forms connecting links with a special meaning in this book.The content of this period is to use “Where’sare„” to determine the place.And according to the contents and the fact of the Ss, I establish the following three teaching aims of this period: Aims on the knowledge: students can listen, read, say and spell the following words: a glass, a fridge, an egg, bread and a table.Aims on the abilities: students can listen, read, say and write the following daily expressions: What’s for breakfast?
Have some juice then.Aims on the emotion(1)To foster Ss’ consciousness of good co-operation and proper competition.(2)To lead Ss to show their loveliness to the poor.III.Key-points of this lesson(1)To help Ss ask and answer the question: What’s in it?
(2)To enable Ss to study in groups and co-operate skillfully.(3)To develop Ss’ interest in English.IV.Difficult points(1)To help the Ss ask and answer the question “What’s in it?” and make sure they can use the plural nouns correctly.(2)To finish the survey by themselves.V.Teaching methods As we all know: the main instructional aims of learning English in primary school is to cultivate pupils’ basic abilities of listening and speaking and their good sense of the English language.So in this lesson I’ll mainly use “Task-based” teaching method.That is to say, I will let the Ss learn in real situations, finish a task by making a survey to help the Ss to get a better understanding of the key structure of the dialogue.I will arrange four kinds of activities: singing, guessing game, finishing a survey and having a competition.And in this lesson a recorder, PPT, school things and a printed form will be needed.Students should prepare some school things.VI.Teaching procedures and purposes of my designing.I’ll finish this lesson in five steps.Step 1.Warm-up and preview 1.Free talk between T and Ss about things in the classroom.2.Sing the song together: Books and pencils.3.Do some TPR, for example: Show me your English me your crayon.4.Review the numbers by asking: “How many crayons do you have?”
Purpose: It is important to form a better English learning surrounding for the Ss by singing and doing some total physical response and at the same time.it provides situations to review learned knowledge for the next step.Step 2.Presentation Now I’ll mainly talk about this step.1.Present the pattern: “My schoolbag is heavy.” “What’s in it?.”(1)Show a bag and say: “Look!I have a bag.” Carry it and say: “Oh, it is heavy.My schoolbag is heavy.” Help the Ss understand the meaning with the help of my body language.Then lead the Ss to read the sentence.Make sure they can say it correctly.(2)T: My schoolbag is heavy.Open the bag and say: “What’s in it? What’s in my schoolbag?” Take out a Chinese book.Then do the action again.Let the Ss read the sentence.2.Play a guessing game.Divide the whole class into four groups to have a competition.Let them guess: What’s in the bag? How many?
Purpose: To present the key structures one by one is much easier for the Ss to learn and grasp the per competition can arouse the Ss’ interest in English learning.3.With the help of the PPT to present the dialogue.Set a situation to help Ss understand: Two Ss are coming.One girl is carrying a heavy bag on her back.They are talking.Girl: My schoolbag is heavy.Boy: What’s in it?
Girl: 20 story-books, 32 pencil, 9 rulers, 12 crayons and 30 picture-books.Etc.Boy: What will you do? Girl: They are for the poor.Boy: Great!I’ll bring some school things too.The boy comes back home and puts a lot of things into the bag.Then he goes to school again and gives them to a teacher.While he is taking them out, he is counting the numbers of all things.The teacher says: Thank you soooooooo much.4.Mention that we should take care of the poor.5.Play the tape.Let the Ss listen and imitate the dialogue.Pay attention to their pronunciation and intonation.Purpose: PPT can provide a real situation for the Ss to understand the dialogue and the relationships between people better.Tell the Ss we should show our loveliness to the Ss.Step 3.Practice Divide Ss into groups of six children.Each one would finish the printed form by asking and answering: How many storybooks do you have? Find out which group finishes faster.Purpose: Task-based teaching method is used here to develop Ss’ ability of communication and also their ability of co-operation will be well trained.Step 4.Assessment Help Ss finish “Let’s check” of this unit and workbook.Purpose: To check the knowledge Ss have learned in this period.Step 5.Add-activity 1.Let Ss tell each other how many school things they have after class.Tell their parents how many school things they have at home.2.Take care of everything they have.Purpose: Revision is so important that Ss should speak English as much as they as in class or after class.It is necessary for the Ss to do some extensive exercise after class to consolidate the knowledge they learned.In a word, the whole period is based on tasks, which are designed from easy steps to steps that are challenging.When the Ss are carting out the tasks, they can acquire information, knowledge, and have their ability and skills trained.That’s all.Thanks a lot for your attention.
七年级新目标英语教案【篇10】
在悠扬的轻音乐中，我开始了上课。这是一堂人物外貌的描述课，所以我用一个游戏“Pally says…”game开始引课。
StepI.Guidance: Play “Pally says…”game目的在于活跃气氛，调动学生的积极性，减少学生的紧张情绪。加之五官属于人的长相的范畴，所以与此课人物外貌相关连，这样引入就能自然过渡到本节课的内容。人物前活动用于扫除学生的语言障碍，因此在教学上以激发学生的学习兴趣为主，通过活动让学生感知、操练语言，为下一步活动做好铺垫。
Rulers: If Pally says touch your eyes/ears/ nose/mouth/shoulder/legs/arm. You should do it . If it doesn’t say that, you can’t do it. If you are wrong, you have to sit down. The person who does it correctly is the winner.
After that we begin to study our lesson.
T: Do you like Miss Hu?
Ss: Yes.
T: Why?
Ss: Because you are beautiful.
T: Thank you. Do you like her?(图片展示)
Ss: Yes.
T: OK, I know you think she is a beautiful girl, too. And you like any beautiful person. Today we learn Unit 7 What does he look like?( 图片展示同时板书。)
Step II. Teach the new words and new sentences pattern.
The teacher uses the pictures to lead and teach the new words and the new sentence pattern. And then ask the Ss to describe the classmates.
先利用图片展示进行新单词句型的引入,让学生熟悉。接着要求其他同学描述三位外貌典型的同学，再小组练习。这样更形象，更贴近生活，学生更容易接受，加强了学生间的合作与交流。再按发形，身高，体重的类别练习以免混淆，同时加深记忆。在教学的过程中，我要求学生描述教室里听课的老师，学生们十分激动，想着能用英语描述自己的老师了，他们特别高兴。此时的气氛很活跃。
StepIII. Pair work
At first the teacher gives the Ss an example. Then ask Ss practice like this.
A:What does he look like?
B: He has short hair. He is tall. He is medium height.
这样完整地描述人的外表是为后面能安排、完成任务做铺垫，同时能检测学生的掌握情况，以便老师随时调控。
StepIV. Play a guessing game.
At first the teacher gives the Ss an example.Then ask Ss to describe anyone in the classroom. Let the others guess.
这个游戏的安排目的是让学生通过他人的描述，去发现别人的外部特征。培养学生听、说以及辨别能力，同时可活跃课堂气氛。
StepV. Free talk: talk about any person who you like.
这是一个任务教学，让学生描述自己的家人、朋友及喜爱的明星，增添他人对自己的了解。学生拿出事先准备好的自己最喜爱的电影、足球明星，在小组里轮流进行描述。然后在组与组之间进行资源共享，让学生在讲台上用投影仪进行展示。（通过这一活动，使学生在掌握一定的英语基础知识和基本技能，能与小组成员合作共同完成学习任务，发展语言的综合运用能力，并创造性地使用英语表达自己的思想）。
StepVI. Describle and draw
Ask Ss to describle “What do you look like when you are 20 years old and draw a picture of it.
设计这个任务目的在于让学生能学有所用，想象设计一下自己20岁风华正茂时的样子，并画出来，让此堂课别开生面，乐趣横生。同时这培养学生的多种能力，让其能动手动口。
StepVII.1a-1b
在学生掌握好的前面的知识的基础上再处理学习书上的知识，就化难为简，学生才能得心应手，同时让学生整体回顾本节课的重点内容。
StepVII. Motto
此格言的安排是为了培养学生尊重他人的品德，不以貌取人。
StepIX. Homework.
1. Copy the sentences in Grammar focus.
2. Describe your friend,your parent, your teacher or any other person,and then write it down in your exercise book
通过以上几步的语言输入练习，让学生在进一步创造性活用所学语言，提高学生的写作能力。
二、课后分析及感想：
反思中教学，教学中成长
精心准备了好久的“节目”上演完毕，心中紧绷的弦终于放了下来，不管结果怎样，我都坦然。因为它毕竟是我努力的心血。从初赛到复赛到决赛，我努力过、奋斗过，有了这个过程，结果怎样就显得不是那么重要了。毕竟我们年轻人就是应该在一次次的磨练中，吸取经验教训，在反思中教学，在教学中成长，才有利今后的进一步提高。当然这次课后我也受益不浅。课后也私下征求了一些老师的意见，询问了学生的学习反馈意见。我一直在思索这个问题：我们的英语课该怎样去上，才能让学生觉得不枯燥，并能学好知识？是天天拿着教材教呢？还是变着花样把生活以及其他学科融入到英语学科，让学生们去感受，去体会，然后学中用，用中学。
本课是初一新教材第7单元的第一部分，教材内容围绕着描述人的外貌特点展开，让学生学会谈论人的身高、体重、发型、面部特征及着装特点。本课的教学内容与学生的实际生活密切相关，易于引发学生运用简单的英语进行交际和交流。在学习活动中，学生能通过交换对不同人物的描述及看法，促进学生之间和师生之间的情感交流，增进情谊。所以在这堂课的设计上我是从以下几个方面去考虑的，以下是本节课的亮点：
第一：丰富的图片信息使用：我们的学生由于他们的年龄特征所定，对形象的事物特别感兴趣，尤其对新新人类更是喜欢。那么就这个特点，我采用了大量的人物图片。而这些图片却是经过精挑细选的：就本课的教学内容它主要是要求描述人物的发型与身材，所以选图时，就得相当有代表性。比如：高个--姚明；矮个--潘长江；胖的--韩红；瘦的--张柏芝等等。让学生一看就能明白这些单词的含义。那么他们说起来也就琅琅上口了。
第三：贴近学生的生活，让学生的口、手齐动。人们常说我们要过“双文明”生活。那我们的学生也应要求思维与动手能力齐备。大量的可行的任务教学设计，有利于学生们对知识的灵活运用。
首先要走进学生的生活，了解他们才能找到让他们动口动手的关键。那么怎样走近学生的生活呢？那就应该知道他们的喜好。我们的学生有强烈的喜恶情绪，有自己所喜欢、所崇拜的明星。那么以此为切口，我设计了一个活动：谈论自己喜欢的明星。这样以来学生就能运用自己所学的知识去描述自己喜欢的明星。并且缩短了与学生的距离，也让他们感受到老师的关心。
我让学生自备明星照片讲述，以及用“猜朋友”的办法来描述他人进行思维与口头的训练，同时我让学生们自己设计绘画自己将来的形象，培养了他们的动手能力，并且描述出来，这就让学生手口齐动。三个环节紧密相扣，层层相关。
第四、发挥多学科知识的联系作用。这一节课要求学生能描述他人的外貌。这就要求学生应具备听、说能力。怎样把这样的能力融入一体，并且学生能很好的接受，同时还能锻炼写的能力呢？怎么办呢？我想学生们的想象能力十分丰富，何不让他们想象一下当他们20岁的时候自己长什么样子呢？可是这个活动又怎么实施呢？我犯难了。我想不如让他们一边描述，一边画出自己的'肖像。这样利用美术知识来巩固本节内容，学习的形式也多样了，岂不更好？
第五、对学生情感上的引导。人的外貌对人的影响是很大的，所以常常有人犯以貌取人的错误。那么我们老师就应该对他们进行正确的引导，培养学生正确的人生观和世界观。于是在此课中通过描述同学、教师或自己的偶像的外貌，表达自己的看法，使学生在人际交往中学会尊重和理解别人，学会交换不同的看法，了解他人的爱好，增进情谊。在选图时，我就侧重强调人物虽然有美丑，但是他们却都有自己的特长，都能在各自的领域成就一翻事业，让学生明白人不可貌相。同时在课末我增添谚语，再次强调人的外貌在人生中不是最重要的因素，能力才是最重要的。
在课堂上我鼓励学生大胆的使用英语，对他们学习过程中的失误和错误采取宽容的态度。以学生为主体，教师旨在导学，不断创设情境让学生参与，积极肯定地评价学生的表现。任务设计较成功，创造条件让学生能够研究他们自己感兴趣的话题。同时注意给学生创设自主学习和交流的机会。学生通过体验、实践、讨论、合作等方式发展了听说读写的综合语言技能。同时我也将在今后的教学中继续探索在任务、与合作型教学中如何调动全体学生的积极性的方法。争取做到让学生独立“自主”学习，参加小组活动进行“合作”学习，做到“探究”学习
本课的设计使学生确实从学习中学会了如何谈论外貌,同时还学会了识别不同人物外貌特征，设计简单形象.丰富了学生生活,同时也是一种真实的体验.增加学生的语言实践，促进他们在整个教学活动中主动参与。
在板书设计上，为了避免学生把is和has混用，我采取了分开总结排版的格式，让学生能一目了然，描述什么该用什么词语。这样能使他们更容易接受，并且能分清它们的区别。 而课后作业是描述朋友、父母的外貌特征。这样设计的目的是为了巩固知识培养和提高学生的写作能力 。通过以上几步的语言输入练习，让学生再进一步创造性活用所学语言，提高学生的写作能力。
从这些方面我设计了本节课，按理说是很不错了，可是上完之后却不如我想象中的那么好。因为此课的设计不管是从内容上还是活动上都是很有激情的，然而学生的激情却没有充分的调动起来，让我很失望。课后我也一直在思考这个问题。我问学生为什么不积极回答我的问题呢？他们给的答案是：“胡老师，我们在那样的大教室里，有那么多老师听课，回答问题很紧张，害怕答错。”原因似乎很简单，但是这个问题却一直萦绕着我。我发现自己还有很多不足：
首先培养学生大胆发言习惯不够。在平常的教学中，学生的胆量是比较大的，可是这学期与上学期他们举手发言的激情却没有那么活跃了。因此我想在今后的教学中我应该注意培养学生大胆开放的性格,让学生在任何场合都能勇于发言，积极思考。
其次，课堂调控能力仍需加强。可能由于自己教学经验不足，导致调控能力不够好，所以没有把学生的激情完全调动起来，导致课堂上没有那么活跃。我应该把握好学生学习的反馈情况，及时调整教学进度。
七年级新目标英语教案【篇11】
重庆市110中学 曹毅
单元整体说明
单元教材分析
本单元是九年制义务课程标准实验教科书《新目标英语》七年级下册第10单元
本单元的核心话题是用一般过去时谈论度假等发生在过去的事情。因此“Where did you go on vacation?“ ” Did you go to the beach? Yes，I did．No，I didn’t．”等是教学的重点。通过对本单元的学习，学生能掌握本单元出现的地点名词，用于询问和回答过去发生的事情的短语和句型。
单元知识结构
词汇：
New York City; Central Park，exam，were，rainy， delicious，expensive，inexpensive．crowded．flew，kite，later，felt，little, corner, discuss，etc
句型: Where did you go on vacation? I went to summer camp．Did she go to Central Park？Yes，she did．No, she didn’t
语法：一般过去时特殊疑问句、一般疑问句及肯、否定回答。
单元总体目标
1．Master the vocabulary
2．Master and use:
Where did you go on vacation? I went to summer camp
Did she go to Central Park？Yes，she did．No, she didn’t
单元教学重难点一览
重点 难点
1．Vocabulary and Expressions
2. Grammar Focus：Where did you go on
vacation？I went to summer camp. Did she go on Central Park？Yes, she did．
No, she didn’t Use the past tense to talk about activities that happened in the past in English with the following sentences：
Where did you go on vacation?
Did you go to…？Yes. … /No，…
单元学情分析
学生在第五单元已接触过一般过去时，具有了学习本单元知识的认知前提，能自然地与本单元话题进行衔接。假期活动Such as; go abroad, go hiking, go hiking, summer camps, and so on接近学生的生活，They are all interested in talking about it.
单元教学建议
首先进行集中识字，为本单元的学习作好铺垫。其次，充分利用听力材料和阅读材料，训练和提高学生的听力和阅读水平。在听读的基础上创设语言情景，加强读写训练。培养学生的听、说、读、写综合能力。
单元课时分配
本单元共4课时：
Section A（一）1课时
Section A〔二）1课时
Section B（一）1课时
Section B（二）1课时
Section A (一)
教学内容
Section A中1a. 1b. 1c. 2a. 2b. 2c. Grammar focus
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary：New York City，Central Park，exam．
2. Master and use：Where did you/ they /he / she go，vacation? I / They /He /She went to the mountains＼New York City＼beach＼summer camp．
Did you go to the beach？ Yes，I did．No, I didn’t．
过程与方法
通过例子Who went to the movies last Saturday?引出动词go的过去式went，从而引出一般过去时态。大面积操练，采用学生提出间题，学生解决问题，借助媒体来提高学生的主动性。
情感态度价值观
学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
l. The vocabulary：New York City, Central Pads，exam．
2. Language：Where did you/they/he/she go on vacation? I/They/He/She went to the mountains/ New York City/ beach /summer camp
Did you go to the beach? Yes，I did. No, I didn’t.
难点
Use the language to talk about past events．
教学突破
对于本课的单词短语通过卡片或图画来引出学习。
Language: Where did you go on vacation?及答语的学习，借助于课本及课件的图画来引出。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
step 1
Organization
（1’、Organize Ss by saying hello to each other. Greeting to teacher.
Step 2
Free talk
(2’） Ask the question:
Who is on duty?
Is everyone here today? The Students talk
about
Step 3
Section A
Presentation
la 1．（Ask questions about what students
did last Saturday）
（1）Who went to the movies last Saturday?
（Point to one student who raises his or her hand.）
Sara went to the movies last Saturday.
（Repeat．Write this sentence on the board. Underline the word went．）
(2) Ask：Who visited a friend last Saturday？
（Point to one student who raises his or her hand．）
Carlos visited a friend last Saturday．
（Repeat．Write this sentence on the board. Underline the word visited．）
2．（Point to the words went and visited in the sentences on the board．）
Say，We use these words to talk about things that happened in the past.
（Write these pairs of words on the board：go--went, visit --visited）
Ask: Can you point out the words that talk about the past?
This activity introduces the key vocabulary． Students raise their hands．
And give the right answer: I did.
Students raise their hands to answer.
Read．
强化记忆
Point to went and visited．
Step 4
Practise
la
3’ 1．Focus attention on the picture．Ask:
What at can you see？Say, Each picture shows something a person did in the past．Name each activity and ask students to repeat；Went to the mountains，went to New York City, went to summer camp，visited my uncle，stayed at home，went to the beach，visited museums.
2．Point to the numbered list of activities．Say each one again and ask the students to repeat．
3．Now, please match each phrase with one of the pictures．Say，Write the letter of each picture next to the name of the activity．Point to the sample answer.
4．Check the answers.
Answers：
1．e 2．B 3．D 4. c 5．a 6．F 7. g Read after the teacher aloud to learn the new phrases．
Read after the teacher。
Do it and then discuss
the keys in pairs．
step 5
Listening
（lb)
(6’）
Presentation This activity gives students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation．
1．Point to the picture.
on the screen
say, look at Picture A，Where did Tia go on vacation? Yes，she went to the mountains．
Ask，What did the person do in each scene?
2．Play the recording the first time.
3．Play the recording a second time.
say，There are three conversations.
The people talk about what they did on vacation．listen to the recording and write numbers of the names in the right boxes in the picture.
Please write only 5 numbers. Point out the
sample answer next to the picture showing went to the mountain.
4．Correct the answers．
ANSWERS：
（1) went to the mountains
(2)visited my uncle
(3）stayed at home
(4) went to New York City
(5)went to summer camp Practice the dialogue in pairs．Eg.
---Where did the boy go on vacation?
---He went to New York City．
only listen.
Listen and number the pictures(1-5)．And then discuss in pairs.
At last raise their hands to tell the result
Read it loudly. 多媒体放映
录音机
录音机
多媒体
放映
Tape script：
Conversation 1
Xiang Hun: Hey, Tina. Where did you go on vacation?
Tina: I went to the mountains．
Xiang Hua: Cool．
Tina: Where did you go, Xiang Hua?
Xiang Hua：I went to New York City．
Conversation 2
Girl: Where did you go on vacation, Sally?
Sally：No where. I stayed at home.
Girl: And where did you go, Brad?
Brad: I visited my uncle.
Conversation 3
Boy 1：Where did you go on vacation, Tom?
Tom: I went to summer camp. It was great.
Pronunciation note
Write to play---played, visit ---visited on the board．Say，We studied the pronunciation of these --- ed endings in Unit 5.
They are both spelled --- ed，but we pronounce one /d/ and the other /Id/．Ask students to repeat these pairs：play－played，visit一visited． Listen carefully and learn the pronunciation of-ed.
多媒体
放映
Step 6
Pair work 1 c
（task 1）
3’ This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language.
1. Point out the example conversation.
Ask two students to read the dialogue to the class.
2. Say，Now work with a partner. You’re your own conversation about the pictures．
3. Say the dialogue in the picture with a student，Do a second example to the class.
4. Have students work in pairs.
As they talk，move around the room monitoring their work．
Offer language or pronunciation support as needed． Read it to the class.
Make a conversation in pairs.
Practice with the teacher,
Work in pairs．
Step 7
Consolidation
(4’） This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language. Talk in groups of three.
2c, group work
(Task2) 1．Say, Get into getups of three. One of you will he Nancy，One will be Marco, and one will be Julie. Ask each other about the vacations. You can talk about the activities from the chart in 2b or about any other activities you like．
2.As Ss talk, move around the room, monitoring the conversations and offering support as needed.
3. Have a group of Ss present their conversation to the class. Work in group of three.
some groups
Would like to act it out，
Step 8Test 4' Loot at test
Step 9
Summary
Grammar Focus
4’ 1. Review the grammar box. Ask Ss to say the questions and answers.
2. Review the difference between regular –ed past tense verbs (stay –stayed, visited). Then say the past form sentences with the form below.
I go to the summer camp
They go to New York City
He stay at home
She visit her uncle
Go to Central Park
I √
He √
She ×
They ×
Read the questions and answers.
Work in pairs
Saying out the sentences: Eg. –where did you go on vacation?
---I went to summer camp.
Eg. Did you go to Central Park?
---Yes, I did.
Step 10
Homework Practice the dialogue according to the picture on Page 1
本课小结
本课学习了1个生词、两个地点短语和英语句式的练习运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练地用一般过去时询问和回答有关过去的事情。
练习设计
随堂练习设计按要求完成句子。
a）I went to the mountains．（改成一般疑问句）
b） Tina went to New York City.（就划线部分提问）
c）Did you go to the beach？（作出肯定回答）
d）Did they go to summer camp？（作出否定回答）
个性练习设计
翻译短语：
（l）呆在家里 ______ （2）去纽约城_____
（3）参加夏令营______（4）去爬山 _____
（5）去海滩______ （6）参观博物馆_____
板书设计
Unit 10
go - went Sara went to the movies last Saturday
visit – visited Carlos visited a friend last Saturday.
play- played
Section A（二）
教学内容
Section A中3a．3b．4
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary：were rainy
Master and use：How was your vacation？how were the beaches？where did you go?
过程与方法
学生通过上一节课的学习，对where引导的过去时态的特殊疑问句，已经掌握。
能自然地与本课知识相衔接。让学生回忆他们的假期情况，引出一般过去时态的句型，并且进行大量练习。采用学生提出问题，学生解决问题，借助媒体来提高学生的主动性。
情感态度价值观
教育学生渗透合作精神和社会公德意识。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary：were rainy fish
2. Language: Where did you go on vacation? I went to the mountains/ New York City /beach /summer camp…
How was your vacation？how were the beaches？
难点
Use the language to talk about past events．
教学突破
对于本课的单词短语通过卡片或图画来引出学习。
Language: Where did you go on vacation?及答语的学习，借助于课本及课件的图画来引出。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件、单词卡片、彩笔
学生准备
预习生词和对话。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Free talk
(2’） Ask the question：Where did you go last Sunday? Students talk about events in the past．
Step 2
Presentation
（16’）
（3a) （用班里的学生为例做练习）
Point out the pictures in the photo album. Ask students to describe what they see．（In Picture 1 there is a man with a bowl of soup．There is also a waiter. He looks angry．） Describe what they
see in picture 1 and
picture 2
Fill in the blanks in
the conversation
Step 3
Practice(36)
(6'） （In picture 2 there is a beautiful beach．There is a man．He looks unhappy．）
Read the first two lines of the dialogue to the class．Point out the answer was in the first line. Then point out the blanks in the rest of the lines of the dialogue．Read the conversation to the class saying the word blank for each blank line: How blank the beaches?
Then say，Write the word was or were in each blank. Ask students to complete the activity on their own．
Point to picture 3 and ask students to say what they see．
Then read the words under the picture．Pronounce any new words and explain what they mean，if necessary Say：In this picture a girl is on a bus．The girl is taking a bus trip．Ask，What does relaxing mean？
Does it mean you are excited or quiet?
How do you look when you relax?
H students don’t know the meaning of relaxing, demonstrate by leaning back in your seat and half一closing your eyes.
Say a dialogue with a student．point to （学生看3a部分）
practice and act．
Listen．
（学生看图互问）
Work with the teacher.
Work with a partner
and act out．
Read and learn．
Make their own conversation 多媒体
放映
图一
图二
the food picture. Ask，How was the food? Do a send example，if you wish．
Move around the room monitoring their work．Offer language or pronunciation support as needed．
Have two students perform the example conversation，or perform it yourself with one student（you ask the questions)．
Point out that the conversations starts off with the sentences in the speech bubbles．
For example，
A：where did you go?
B: I went to…
A: What was the weather like?
B: It was hot and humid． Practice in pairs．
The student replies，it was awful．
work in pairs
Look at picture6，
Practice the conversation below．
Ask and answer questions． 多媒体
放映
Step 4
Practice
（10'） Say：First fill in the chart with the information about your last vacation，Say where you went，what the weather was like, what you ate，and what else you did．As students fill in the chart move around the classroom, monitoring progress and offering help as necessary。 Something in the pictures．
Act it out
Fill in the chart with
Their own information
Then ask and answer 多媒体
放映
本课小结
本节课学习了3个生词，和句式的练习运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练地运用句型where did you go? I went … .
练习设计
1、动词的适当形式填空：
A: Where _____ you ______ on your vacation?（go）
B：I _______ to the stores．(go) what about you?
A: I ______ at home (stay)
B: What ______you _______？（do)
A：Nothing much.
B: Why ______ you _______at home?（stay）
A：I just _______ to go out．（not want）
2. Make a conversation and act．
板书设计
Unit 10
1. were rainy
2. Where did you go on vacation? I went to...
Section B（一）
教学内容
Section B中la. 1b．lc．2a．2b．2c
教学目标
知识与能力
1．Match the vocabulary：
delicious, awful expensive, inexpensive, crowded
2. Master and use：Where did Vera go on vacation?
Did Vera like the vacation?
How were the stores? They were very expensive.
过程与方法
通过例子The ring is one hundred million dollars．It’s expensive.引人本课，设置会话情景来激发学生兴趣，调动其学习主动性。利用多媒体图片大量练习句型，提出问题，解决问题，体现师生互动。
情感态度价值观
教育学生热爱生活，积极参与班级集体活动。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
1. The vocabulary：delicious, awful, expensive，inexpensive，crowded
2. language：Where did you \ they\ he\ she go on vacation?
I＼They \ He＼She went to Japan．
How were the museums/ people /stores? They were crowded expensive /friendly．
难点Use the language to talk about past events．
教学突破
对于本课的单词短语通过多媒体图画和设置的情境来引出学习。
Language: Where did you go on vacation?及答语的学习，借助于课本及课件的图画来引出。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization
（1’） Organize Ss by greeting each other.
Step 2
Presentation (1 a)
（11’） Ask：What do you think of this book?
Is it interesting?（通过对话弓l出本
课要学习的新形容词expensive 等）Point to the picture, This is a ring. The price is one hundred million
dollars． Answer the questions
together
Say：It’s expensive． 多媒体
体图片
Step 3
1b writing
(5’） This activity introduces more key vocabularies．
Point out the six words delicious，awful，expensive，inexpensive, crowded
1．Say each word and ask students to repeat them，
2．Call attention to the fourth picture saying: This is a cake．
It’s delicious！Then do the same thing for all six pictures．
crowded delicious
3．Then point out the blank line in front of each numbered word．
4．Point out the sample answer. As students work，move around the room answering questions as needed．
Answers
1．f2．a3.d 4.e 5 6.c
This activity provides writing practice using the target language．
Simple draw：the smiley face and the frowny face．Say，the smiley face is for good things. The frowny face is for bad things.
Point out the sample answer. Say, The word delicious is under the smiley face because delicious is a happy word.
Ask students to finish the activity individually， Repeat loudly
Practice in pairs then
act it out
Match each word
with a picture by writing the letter of each picture in the blank in front of the correct word.
Discuss in groups
（act the faces out) 多媒体
放映
图片
1. delicious, inexpensive, crowded
2. awful, expensive, crowded City some examples to learn these adjectives.
This activity gives students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation.
Step 4
Listening
(2a)
(8'） 1．Point out the two questions. After you hear the conversation, please answer these questions. Read the questions to the class.
2. Play the recording the first time.
Students only listen.
This time say, listen to the recording and write the answer to each question.
3. listen to the recording the second time.
correct the answers. Cite some examples to learn these adjectives
Listening.
2b(4'） 1．She went to Tokyo.
2. Yes, she did.
Tapescript
Girl: Hi, Vera , How was your vacation?
Vera: It was great！
Girl: Where did you go?
Vera: I went to Tokyo with my family.
Girl]: Really? Wow！What did you do there?
Vera：Well, we went to a lot of museums.
Girl: Oh, how were they？
Vera: They were really interesting. But they were also very crowded. Did you meet any Japanese people? Listen.
Then answer．
Listen and write.
Then discuss the keys in pairs
Read and practice in pairs. Recorder
Vera: Yeah，the people were really friendly．My parents have some Japanese friends，and we had dinner at their house．
Girl：How was the food?
Vera：It was delicious．I love Japanese food．
This activity provides further
listening practice using the target language
Call attention to the chart. Read the words in the chart：
Her vacation, the museum the stores，the people，the food．
Point out the sample answer. Say，What does Vera think of her vacation? It was great.
Play the recording. Play the recording a second time．Ask students to finish filling in their answers and to check their answers．
Correct the answers．
Answers．
vacation-great
people -- friendly
museums一interesting, crowded
food-- delicious
store一expensive
delicious relaxing Read aloud.
then discuss the keys．
Listen and fill in the
chart．Then discuss
the keys． 多媒体
多媒体
Step 5
Pair work
(2c Task)
(5’） This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language．
Call attention to the question words．
Have a student read them to the class ．Ask Where did you go on vacation? Say，please work in pairs．As students talk，move around the room
offering pronunciation and language support as needed． Read out．
（Role play) 多媒体
放映
本课小结
本节课总共学习了6个形容词以及where和how句式的练习运用。通过本节课的学习，学生能熟练地用英语表达自己的感受，培养了他们热爱集体活动的情感。
练习设计
随堂练习
词类转换
1) expensive(反义词）______ 2)crowd(反义词)________ 3 ) awful（反义词）________
4)friend(形容词)________ 5)go(过去式) _______ 6) do(过去式)_________
个性练习设计
翻译下列句子
1)你是去哪儿度的假？
2)我们去了许多博物馆。
3) -----那儿的商店怎么样？一 都很贵。
4) 日本朋友们对我们很友好。
板书设计
Unit 10
1．delicious，awful, expensive, inexpensive
2．Where did Vela go on vacation?
How were the stores?
Section B (二)
教学内容
Section B3a.3b．3c．4以及Self Check 3
教学目标
知识与能力
1. New words and expressions：flew kite later felt little corner discuss difficulty
过程与方法
通过复习一般过去时引出本课的重点------日记。
情感态度价值观
学会日记的写法。
教学重、难点及教学突破
重点
The vocabulary: flew kite later felt little comer till fry question discuss difficulty
难点
日记的格式。
教学突破
对于本课的单词短语通过卡片或图画来引出学习。
Language: 通过询问过去的事情引出日记。
教学准备
教师准备
录音机、磁带、课件
学生准备
预习生词和课文。
教学步骤
教学步骤、时间 教师活动 学生活动 媒体应用
Step 1
Organization
（1’） Organize Ss by greeting each other.
Step 2
Free talk
(2’） Ask the questions：
What day is it today?
What day was it yesterday? Answer: It is Friday．It was Thursday．
Step 3
Presentation
Section B 3a
（17’） 1．Let the students read Kim’s travel diary and find the new words．
2．Teach the new words:
later, felt，little, corner
Explain the meaning and the usage of the new words．
Let the students write the new words．
3．Say，Now read the diary and circle
all the good things about Kim’s holiday．Underline all the bad things. Ask them to notice the description words that tell them whether something is“good”or “bad，” You may want to ask a student to tell you what the first“bad thing” was.
4．Check the answers．
Answers
Good things：
The weather(great） Read Kim's travel diary and find out the new words．
Read the new words after then write them in the notebooks．
Read again and finish the activity individually.
Then discuss in pain:
Read aloud，Then read the diary，try to learn the key words by hearts. 多媒体
The beach(beautiful)
Playing in the waves(fun)
Finding the little boy/returning him to his father(happy)
Playing tennis (really fun)
Eating fried fish and garlic vegetables (delicious)
Bad things：
Kim’s kite breaking（not much fun) Museum (boring and crowded)
No money for taxi/walking back to
hotel（tired)
5．The teacher tell the students the methods of writing the diary.
Step 4
Practice writing
（Section B 36)
（10’） Thus activity provides guided writing
practice using the target language．
1．Say，Now write a travel diary like the one in 3a.
2．Have the students do the activity individually. You may want to have them write on pieces of paper, since space in the textbook is limited. As they work，move around he classroom offering assistance as necessary. Look at the pictures and write a diary.
3．Have several students read out their diaries to the class（You might want to make this activity more substantial, and set it as written homework to be collected and marked.）
4. Do a Survey
Ask students to interview friends and family members and write down where they went on vacation. Ask the students to list at least one activity or place they visited in that city and whether it was good or bad Ask students to share this information with the rest of the class. The students read their own diary
The students write their vacation and tell each other. 多媒体
放映
Step 5
Groupwork
(task)
Section B 4
(7’） This activity gives students listening and speaking practice using the target language.
1 Say, Now you can talk about a real vacation or an imaginary one. The other students can ask you questions. You can use the diary you wrote for activity 3b if you want.
2. Ask students to get into groups of four. One student in each group begins by telling where he or she went. The other students ask questions. Then they switch roles, so each student has a chance to tell the others about his or her vacation.
3. Move around the room, offering vocabulary and pronunciation support as needed. Talk about it in
groups
The students talk
about their real vacation．
Be divided into groups of four and ask questions each other.
Talk aloud.
Step 6
Homework 1．Master the new words.
2．Write a diary
本课小结
本节课学习了19个生词，和日记的写法。通过本节课的学习，学生能掌握日记的格式。
练习设计
1. Write a diary．
2. Make a survey about the circumstance．
教学探讨与反思
能设置一种情景，让学生在假期中“真正”去过某些地方，然后再进行问答，相信会更好。
尽可能多地创设英语氛围，以提高学生的语言综合运用能力。任务型教学能调动学生的积极性，激起学生的好奇心，使学生产生成就感，进一步激起他们对英语的兴趣。学生学习语言是在理解的基础上运用语言，在用中学。为学生提供了使用英语的语境。着重培养学生的创新精神和独立思维能力，并在学习的基础上了解文化差异，培养合作精神和社会公德意识。
如果把课堂教学内容扩展到课外活动中去。形成课内外互相补充、互相促进的学习方式会更好
板书设计
Unit 10
How to write a diary?
七年级新目标英语教案【篇12】
Unit 3 Is this your pencil 掌握本单元的重点词汇；
pencil, book, eraser, box, pencil case, schoolbag, dictionary，mine，yours, game, bag, some, ask, classroom, help?.按要求完成下列各题。
The blue cup is his.(变一般疑问句)____________________________________ This is my book..(改为同义句)______________________________________(3)These are erasers.（变单数句）_________ is _______eraser.(4)Bob is my good friend.(变一般疑问句并作肯定回答)Is Bob _________ good friend? ________,____________.(5)The girl is Jim’s sister.（对划线部分提问）_________ _______ the girl? Step2.课堂呈现
(1)Is that/this??意为“那是/这是??吗？”，读时用升调。它是在陈述句“That/this is?”的基础上，把be动词is 提到句首得来的。
This和that的区别：
This和that都是指示代词。this表示“这，这个”，用来指代较近处的人或事物；that表示“那，那个”，用来指代较远的人或事物。肯定回答：Yes, it is.否定回答： No, it isn’t.(2)no 和not 的区别：
no作形容词时表示“不，没有”置于名词前。 have no sister.作副词时表示“不”。用于回答一般疑问句。可单独使用，它的反义词是yes.-----Are you Jack?----No, I’m 是副词,表示“不”。常用于be动词.助动词.情态动词之后，帮助构成否定句，不恩能够单独使用。eg She is not a teacher.(3)Excuse me 意为“对不起，打扰一下”，是英语国家的人常在口边的话，可用于很多场合，如指原谅一个人的过失，或提出不同的意见时的客气语。在美国，它常常用于与陌生人开始谈话或打扰别人时表示礼貌的用语。
me, could you tell me where the nearest bus stop is? I’m sorry 和Excuse me 的区别：
I’m sorry 用于对已经发生过的事情感到抱歉，难过。’m sorry, I’m me用于麻烦或打扰别人时，主要用于提醒别人，或唤起他人的注意。 me, where is the menu?(4)thank you for?意为“为??而感谢”是用于表示感谢的表达方式。后面接for短语，是说明感谢的原因。
you for your pencil.=Thanks for your 随堂练习
根据汉语提示完成句子。
This is _____(我的) pen is____(她的).--Is this _____(你的)pencil?--Yes, it’s _______(我的).（3）This book isn’t ______(他的).That is ________(他的)book.（4）______(我)am your can call________(我)Miss Wang.(5)What are these? They’re _________(手表).Section B 一.教学步骤： Step1.课前预习句子翻译。
这是你的手表吗？_____________________________ 这是我的身份证。_____________________________ 你的电话号码是多少？_____________________________ 这是海伦的文具盒。_____________________________ 字典怎么拼写？_____________________________ Step 2 课堂呈现
当询问某个东西是什么时，用what引导的疑问句提问。回答这种疑问句时，是什么，就答什么。回答时，常用it指代所询问的东西。
eg, What’s her QQ number？
特殊疑问句的特点：
句型为“特殊疑问词+be(am, is ,are)+主语”或“特殊疑问句+do+主语+动词原形” 特殊疑问词包括who, what, when, where, why和how 用助动词帮助提问，构成问句时，主语后的谓语动词必须是实义动词。
当主语是he, she, it时，则应该用助动词dose帮助提问。特殊疑问句应读降调。How is your brother? Ask the teacher for it.该句使用了ask sth.句型，意为“向某人要某物”，介词for后面跟名词或代词。
asks his dad for a digital camera.(3)E-mail me at?用的是“E-mail+人+at+电子邮件地址”，意为“用电子邮件联系某人。”句中at为介词，引导短语说明联系方式。
eg This is his E-mail E-mail him at May (4)I must find it.句中must是情态动词，意为“一定，必须”,它后面必须跟动词原形。I must keep it must do it today.句中find意为“发现，找到“是及物动词，后面要跟（找到或发现的）”物品、人。I find my 随堂练习
1.根据汉语意思完成下列句子。
(1)．那是你的金戒指吗？
Is _______ your ________ __________?(2)．今天晚上你能给我打电话吗？
Can you _______ ________ this ________?(3)．把你的笔记本放在你的背包里。
put your _________ _________ your backpack.(4)．你的棒球在书桌里吗？
________ your _________ __________ the desk?(5)．让我们一起去玩电脑游戏吧。
________ go and play _________ __________
七年级新目标英语教案【篇13】
新目标英语七年级上册Unit5教学设计
原州四中
牛平平
核心提示：教材分析
1、教学内容 1)、词汇：have，soccer，ball，tennis racket，ping-pong ball，volleyball，basketball sport，bat，2)、语言结构：A、Do you have a ping-pong ball？Yes，I do。Do you have a ping-pon
教材分析
1、教学内容
1)、词汇：have，soccer，ball，tennis racket，ping-pong ball，volleyball，basketball，bat，2)、语言结构：A、Do you have a ping-pong ball？Yes，I do。Do you have a ping-pong bat？No，I don’t。
2、教材的地位及其作用
本单元的教学主要内容是：学习have的一般现在时的疑问式的肯定和否定回答，该话题与学生的日常生活紧密联系在一起，容易唤起学生的学习兴趣，这对于提高学生的综合能力很有帮助，特别是说的能力。
本单元仍在继续学习一般现在时，这是一个生活中离不开的时态，也是最基本的一个时态。新课程标准要求学生重点掌握一般现在时，这在英语中使用频率很高，学好这一时态的用法对以后其他时态的学习和交际有很大的帮助。
二、学生分析
学生现有的能力与已掌握的知识：
学生在已经学过词汇：What is this ？ What is that？ 句型： Where is…? It’s in / on / under/…
经过前面的学习学生已经积累了一定的词汇，掌握了一定的目标语，已经具备了一定的听说读写能力。
三、教学目标
1、语言知识
词汇：A、重点掌握表示有关各种运动球类的名词, 如basketball, soccer ball，so on
重点句型：? Do you have a TV? Yes，I do．／No，I don’t.2、语言技能
1）、能看着图片说；Do you have a TV? Yes，I do．／No，I don’t.3、学习策略
1）、利用老师所提供的图片卡片做出简单的判断。
2）、通过与同学交流，学会使用一般现在时的疑问形式及肯定和否定回答。
4、情感态度
1）通过各小组的对话练习培养学生的合作精神； 2）通过学习本单元，让学生之间能够用所学句型互相交流。
重点难点
1、Have 的一般现在时的疑问式用法;
2、Have的一般现在时的疑问句，及其肯定，否定回答;教学手段：采用多媒体教学。教学突破：Section A重在通过使用动词have对物品的所属进行提问和回答的交流式口语活动，学习由助动词do引导的一般疑问句的构成以及回答。教师要善于引导学生比较行为动词的疑问句和be动词的疑问句在构成和回答上的区别，通过大量和反复地操练以达到运用自如。
四、教学流程
一、第一教学环节：情景创设，导入新课 教师活动 学生活动
Section A主要内容是通过使用have对物品的所属进行提问和应答，来学会使用do引导的一般疑问句。所以在教学中可采取问答式导人法：
掌握新单词.采用各种方法学习单词。
1、升降语调、拼读、接龙和肢体的方式记忆单词。
2．检查学生记忆单词的成效。
3、学生看1a的图片,使字母和单词相对应。
第二教学环节；老师和学生互动：学习掌握重要内容。
教师活动 学生活动（看图片练句型）分片进行演示：I have a footba1 1.Do I have a football? 自己回答：Yes，I do． 再问：Do I have a basketball? 自己回答：No，I don’t．再使用其它物体和图片询问学生：Do I have…? 询问学生：Do you have…? 询问学生：…?
2.要求学生完成1b的听力，达到教学应完成的任务。
3．引导学生展开Pair work活动，完成lc部分口语交际的教学任务，学会运用助动词do进行问答，可采用师生互动带动学生互动的交流方式： 4．Pair work活动，完成lc部分口语交际的学习任务，学会运用助动词do进行问答并上台展示口语交际。
三、第三教学环节：合作交流，巩固提高
教师活动 学生活动
1、学生巩固练习活动，完成课堂练习和总结及笔头练习的教学任务。
2、让总结本课的 主要内容，如果不周到，教师可以补充完成。
七年级新目标英语教案【篇14】
新目标七年级英语下册期末试卷
时间：80分钟 内容：unit1---12 总分：110分
学校 —————— 班级——————姓名 —————— 座号————
一、补全单词。﹙5分﹚
1、r--le﹙规则﹚ 2、m--nd﹙介意﹚ 3、ch----p﹙便宜﹚
4、st----﹙停留﹚ 5t----﹙茶﹚ 6、b----f﹙牛肉﹚
7、b----ld﹙体格﹚8、r--n﹙雨﹚9、w--sh﹙洗﹚ 10、f--sh﹙鱼﹚
二、英汉词组匹配。﹙10分﹚
A、漂亮的 B、赞同 C、万里长城 D、少年宫 E、不再
F、中国文化 G、访谈节目 H、 一大碗 I、故宫 J、 肥皂剧
1、 talk show 2、 China Culture 3、 soap opera 4、 good—looking
5 、agree with 6、 the Great Wall 7、 not…any more
8、 the Palace Museam9、 the Children’s Palace 10、 a large bowl of
三、从Ⅱ栏中找出Ⅰ栏中问句的适当答语。（共10小题，每小题0.5分，计5分）
Ⅰ Ⅱ
﹙﹚ 1. What does your brother look like? A. Yes, they did.
﹙﹚2. How was your weekend? B. It’s ten yuan
﹙﹚ 3. What time did Tom get to school? C. He’s tall with brown hair
﹙﹚4. Did your parents go to the movies yesterday? D.At about six o’clock
﹙﹚5. Where does Mr Smith come from? E. Yes, there is.
﹙﹚6. What is your best friend like? F. They are playing soccer.
﹙﹚7. Are the children playing soccer or basketball?G. I like Chinese.
﹙﹚8. Do you like English or Chinese? H. America.
﹙﹚9. How much is the book? I. She is really friendly.
﹙﹚10. Is there a post office near here? J. It was great.
四、根据句意及首字母提示，补全单词。﹙5分﹚
1 、I often v___ my grandmother.
2 、Where did you go on v______ last year?
3、She went shopping last night, but the shops were too c______.
4 、My brother usually a_____ late for class.
5 She likes the scarf, but I don’t s_____ it.
五、用所给词的'适当形式填空。﹙10分﹚
1、Don’t ______﹙eat﹚in the classroom.
2、They________﹙go﹚to the beach last weekend.
3、Miss Wang is ________﹙friend﹚to us.
4、Look! The boys__________﹙play﹚soccerover there.
5、They enjoy ________﹙listen﹚to music.
6、There aren’t_______﹙some﹚mutton in the fridge.
7、She _______﹙wash﹚clothes every morning.
8、It’s_____﹙sun﹚. Let’s go out for a walk.
9、We have to______﹙clean﹚the classroom on school day.
10、Thank you for______﹙join﹚us.
六、选择最佳的一个答案。﹙20分﹚
﹙﹚1、You are from Australia, can you _____Japanese?
A、 speak B、 say C、 tell
﹙﹚2 、You are a good girl._ _________
A、 Thank you very much B 、Sure C 、OK
﹙﹚3．________ late for school again.
A. Not B．Not be C．Don’t be D． Aren’t
﹙﹚4、 This is my friend, he is a _________boy.
A、 14-years-old B、 14 years old C 、14-year-old
﹙﹚5、 _______did you go last Sunday?-- I went to the zoo
A 、 How B．Where C．When D．Why
﹙﹚6、 Go straight and ___________left. The hospital is next to the post office.
A． turn B．take C．go D． carry
--What_______ _your English teacher _____like?—She is tall with long hair.
A．is, look B．is, looks C．does, look D．do, looks
﹙﹚7、My friend ________a medium build and she ________medium height.
A．has, has B．is , is C．has, is D． is , has
﹙﹚8、 --How was your vacation, Sarah?--________.
A． It’s pretty good B．It was pretty good C．It’s hot D．It was hot
﹙﹚9、 _____ Sunday night , we went to movies.
A 、On B、 At C、 In
﹙﹚10 How about ______ fishing this afternoon?
A、 go B、 goes C 、going
﹙﹚11、 ____________ I’d like some chicken.
A、 Do you like it? B、 Can I help you? C、 What do you like?
﹙﹚12、 Mary like playing __ guitar, but she doesn’t like playing __soccer.
A、 the B、 the, the C、, the
﹙﹚13、 John doesn’t like math, Lily doesn’t, ____.
A、 also B 、too C、 either
﹙﹚14、 She is a waiter. She is ___ at night, but she is free in the morning.
A、 funny B、 busy C 、tired
﹙﹚15、 Is there a park near here? _ __________
A 、Yes, there is. B 、No, it isn’t. C、 No, there is.
﹙﹚16、 Please be _____!It is a reading room.
A 、shy B、 smart C、 quiet
﹙﹚17 、This TV show is _____ , so I want to sleep.
A、 boring B、 interesting C、 exciting
﹙﹚18、 What would you like_____ lunch?-- A bowl of noodles, please.
A、 for B 、with C、 in
﹙﹚19、 There ____ many people in the park yesterday.
A was B were C are
﹙﹚20、 Why __go out for a walk?
A 、don’t B、 not C 、can’t
七、句型转换。﹙15分﹚
1、 I’d like some chicken noodles.﹙划线部分提问﹚ _____ _____ you _____ ?
2、Do your homework after school.﹙否定句﹚ _____ _____ your homework after school.
_3、She gets up at six every morning.﹙一般疑问句﹚ ____ she ___ ____ at six every morning?
4、His brother has some tomatoes. ﹙同2﹚His brother ____ _____ _____ tomatoes.
5、What do you think of the TV show ?﹙同2﹚ _____ _____ you _____ the TV show?
6、What can I do for you ? ﹙同2﹚_____ _____ _____ ______ ?
7、He watched TV last night. ﹙同3﹚____ he ___ TV last night?
8、Mr. Wang is teaching English in the classroom.﹙同1﹚
_____ ____ Mr. Wang _____ in the classroom?
9、Mr. Black is a little bit heavy.﹙同1﹚ _____ _____ Mr. Black _____ _____ ?
10、He is from Japan. ﹙划线部分提问﹚___________he _____?
八、完形填空（10分）
It 51 Sunday yesterday. We has 52 classes. I got up at 6:30 53 morning. Then my mother and I went to the shop. We wanted to do some 54. My mother wanted to buy some food 55 super and I wanted to buy some school things: some books and a pen. The shop56 early in the morning.57a lot of people in the shop. They were 58, old and young. Some things in the shop were cheap, some were not. We bought some food and school things. The people in the shop 59 friendly 60.
51．A．is B．was C．it’s D．it was
52．A．no B．not C．not any D．much
53．A．in B．in the C．at D．at the
54．A．shops B．shopping C．shopping D．shop
55．A．for B．to C．with D．at
56．A．open B．opening C．is opening D．opened
57．A. There is B．There has C．There were D．There have
58．A．man and womanB．mans and womans C． men and women D．a man and a woman
59．A．was B．were C．did D．have
60．A．for we B． to us C． for our D． to ours
60．A．for we B． to us C． for our D． to ours
九、阅读理解：（共10小题，每小题2分，计20分）
A
Billy and Sam were twins. They were in the same class. They were both very happy. One day their teacher asked the class to write a composition(作文)“My Mother”. Sam wrote one, but Billy was lazy. He just copied his brother’s.The next day, the teacher asked Billy why his composition was the same as Sam’s. “We have the same mother, don’t we?”answered Billy.
根据短文内容判断句子正误，正确的填A，错误的填B。
61．Sam was older than Billy.
62．Sam and Billy were in different classes
63． The name of the composition was” My Mother”
64．Billy’s composition was the same as Sam’s
65．Billy was not lazy. He was very clever
B
TV PROGRAMMERS(节目)
Channel 1 Channel 2
18:00 Around China 17:45 Computers today
18:30 Cartoon network 18:10 Chinese arts
19:00 News 18:30 English classroom
19:30 Weather report 18:50 Animal world
19:40 Around the world 19:25 China’s
20:10 TV play: Sisters 20:20 Sports
21:00 English for today 21:00 TV play: Big family
21:15 Popular music 21:45 English news
21:55Talk show 22:00 Music
66．You want to know something about Japan, you can watch________
A．Weather report B．China’s 2004 C．Around the world D．Animal world
67．You are a football fan. You may watch TV at___________.
A．19:00 on Channel 2 B．19:40Channel 1 C．20:20Channel 2 D．21:15Channel
68．How long does the TV play“sisters”last(持续)？
A．30 minutes B．50 minutes C．90 minutes D．120 minutes
69．You can watch _______if you want to learn English.
A．English news B．English classroom C．English for today D．A、B and C
70．Children often like to watch_________.
A．Cartoon network B．News C．Weather report D．Sports
B：Great! Thanks.
十、作文。﹙10分﹚谈一谈你学校的规章制度。
扩展阅读
八年级新目标英语教案十五篇
每名教师在上课之前都需要认真规划教案和制作课件，因此在撰写时不应草率对待。教案是教师展现教育智慧的重要方式之一。本文主要介绍了关于“八年级新目标英语教案”必要的知识，请将此链接收藏起来以便查阅！
八年级新目标英语教案 篇1
人教版八年级英语教案上册Unit 5 教学设计为学生设置情境，帮助学生在不同情况下做出正确的选择和回答，使学生在应用中掌握知识。
1. 掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Canyou come to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation
礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。
礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation
根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。
1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：
教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。
2.完成任务，合作学习：
教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握所学的知识。
任务一：Planning abirthday party.
让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。
任务二：Writing aninvitation card.
学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。
学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。
完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：
We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?
When is it going tostart?
I’m sorry. I haveto....
3. 拓展学习：
学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的.特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。
可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。
①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。
③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。
have a rest play there bebe busy practice be free listen to
1. Can they __________the music in the classroom?
2. I’m sorry. TomorrowI’m __________ soccer and having a math lesson.
3. He has got a badheadache. Let him______________.
4.__________ a lot ofinteresting books in the library.
5. We’ll have a pianolesson on Friday. The teacher asked us ________ the piano everyday.
6. Paul and Eliza___________ both ________ on Sunday. They can watch the footballmatch.
7. I’m sorry,I___________ really ___________ this week. I can’t go to seeyou.
( ) 1. Would you like acold drink?
( ) 2. Would you like togo to the cinema on Friday?
( ) 3. Would you like ahamburger?
( ) 4. Would you likethat cassette for your birthday?
( ) 5. Would you likehelp with your homework?
a. No thanks, I don’tlike that kind of music.
b. No thanks, I don’t eatmeat.
c. Yes please, I feelvery thirsty.
d. Yes please, I can’tunderstand it at all.
e. No thanks, I don’tlike cinemas.
1. 应为listento根据题中music，引出词组listen to the music
2. 应为playing，与句尾having amath lesson 呼应。
3. 应为have a rest，注意词组letsb. do sth.
4. 应为There are，因为后面的a lotof interesting books是复数。
5. 应为to practice，注意词组asksb. to do sth.
6.应为are…free，注意句意“他们能看足球比赛”。
7.应为am…busy，注意句意“我不能去看你”。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇2
八年级新教材 Unit 2 教案-八年级英语教案-英语教案,试题,论文,听力
The first period: The road to modern English (Reading)
本单元以“世界英语”为中心话题，旨在通过本单元的学习让学生粗略了
解世界英语的发展状况，认识各种各样具有民族、地域特色的英语以及它
们的出现原因和不同之处。同时让学生能够区分、转述带“命令”或“请
求”语气的祈使句，并让学生能用所学构思方法写一篇关于学习经验的作
文。本节课为阅读课，包括Warming-up, Pre-reading, Reading和Comprehending
四个部分。Warming up介绍世界英语，要求学生区分英美语单词。此部分的
目的'是丰富学生有关世界英语的知识，激发学生对英语发展历史的兴趣。
Pre－reading 部分设置了两个与主题有关世界英语的问题。在激活学生已有的
知识的同时引导学生为下一步阅读做好准备。Reading部分简单地说明英语语
言的起源、发展变化、行成原因，以及它的发展趋势。Comprehending 部分旨
在检测学生对课文基本内容的理解程度。具体操作时根据学生的实际情况对
include, play a role, because of, international, native, come up, culture, actually, present,
vocabulary, usage, identity, such as, rapidly
World Englishes come from those countries…(P9)
Native English speakers can understand each other…(P9)
It became less like German, and more like French…(P10)
Enable the students to describe the history of English and know of the differences between
American English and Britain English.
Help the students learn how to analyze the way author describe the history of English.
Divide the text into two parts and find the main idea of each paragraph.
Work together with the partners and express one’s opinion on why people all over the world want to
learn English.
Discussion, reading, listening, cooperative learning, asking-and-answering.
A computer, a recorder and a screen.
Arouse the students’ interest and let the students know of world English.
1. How many languages can you speak?
Standard Chinese, Cantonese, English, Japanese…
2. Which language is used most widely? English
And which language has the largest number of speaker? Chinese
3. English is spoken in many countries, can you list some?
Britain, American, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, India …
4. Why English is spoken in other countries, like American, India…?
1). Englishmen once ruled American, India…
2). Many people moved to America.
……
5. Do you think the kinds of English spoken in these countries are the same?
6. Guess which of the following words are British English and which are American English.
mum/mom in a term/on a term rubber/eraser
British English: mum, in a term, rubber, petrol, center.
7. Do you think old English and modern English are the same?
Listen to an English song ---- Auld Lang Syne,pay attention to the
lyrics (歌词)in red. And what conclusion can you get from this song?
Should auld (old) acquaintance be forgotten.
and never brought to mind?
Should auld (old)acquaintance be forgot
and days of auld lang syne (为了过去的好时光?)
For auld lang syne my dear, for auld lang syne
We’ll take a cup of kindness yet for auld lang syne.
And here’s a hand my trusty friend
and gie’s a hand of thine.(give us a hand of yours)
We’ll take a cup of kindness yet for auld lang syne.
Get the students to know the history of English and help the students to form a good habit of reading.
Get the students to know the history of English and help the student to form a good habit of reading.
A. Fast-readingRead the text quickly and answer two questions:
1. How did different kinds of English come about?
All languages change when cultures communicated with one another.
2. When was India ruled by Britain?
Read the text again carefully and finish three tasks:
1. Do Ex.1 of Comprehending on page 10.
Keys: 1.A 2.D 3.C 4.D 5.B
2. How do you understand the title? (The history and development of English)
3. How many parts can the text be divided into?
and find the main idea of each paragraph. (You can discuss in groups.)
八年级新目标英语教案 篇3
新目标八年级英语课件
一、教学目标：
1、目标语言
重点词汇：1,want somebody to do 2. be good for 3.pretty healthy 4.my eating habit 4.try to do 5.two or three times a week 6. help somebody do 7.look after my health 8.get good grades 9.study better 10.the same as 11. kind of unhealthy
重点句型：-含有以上词组的11句子。
综合能力：能阅读介绍饮食习惯方面的文章
2、情感渗透
学会养成良好的生活习惯和饮食习惯，从而合理安排自己的各项工作，享受丰富多彩的校园生活。
二、教学准备：
教师准备：
预习导航:：
1、听单词录音，熟记Section A的新单词，并制作单图片。
2、完成1a，列出图中物品的英语单词，并识记新单词。
3、读1a、1c中的对话，区别My name’s Jenny.和I’m Jenny.
4、找出并区别I you my your his her。
三、教学过程：
1. 预习导学或自测
1) 很少/几乎不曾_______________
2) surf the lnternet _______________
3) 大部分学生__________________
4) as for ________________________
5) 一周两次_______________________
6) be good for ________________________
7) 照顾___________________________
8) eating habits ______________________
9) 六到八次_______________________
10) try to do sth ___________________
Step1. Revision.
Ask and answer in pairs like this.
What do you do on weekends/、、、/I often exercise How often do you exercise ?. I exercise five times a week.
(设计说明)先有老师示范对话，询问学生周末日常活动，然后两人一组自由对话，利用图片进行。为新课学习作好铺垫。
Step2.Leading in.
1，要求学生将单词和字母对应，完成1a任务,2，引导学生进行1B的pair work 活动，自编对话完成1b中的学习内容。
(设计说明)这里可巩固练习词组,want somebody to do.与 be good for并造句子。
Step3：
3．播放录音，要求学生完成2a的听力内容。
4．再播放录音，要求学生完成2b的听力内容，并将此词填在合适的位置。(设计说明)通过听力训练，使学生学会听关键词和推测词意的能力,并理解目标语言。
5．引导学生进行2c的Pair work活动，自编对话，完成2c中的学习内容。
6．引导学生阅读3a的短文，要求学生回答设计的问题，完成3a的内容引导学。合作探究 课文解析. 3a
1) pretty表示“十分”作副词用，我们以前学过quite和very也有这种意思。其中它们的程度由浅入深为quite→pretty→very.
相当健康：
2)I exercise every day, usually when I come home from
School.我每天锻炼身体，
3) eating habits：
4) try to do sth意为
eg：他尽力通过考试：
5) Of course.：
6) So you see, I look after my health. 所以你看，我很在意我的健康。
look after 意为
eg：Can you when I leave?
能帮我照顾一下孩子吗？
look还可以和许多词搭配，但意思不一样。
（1）look at
eg：Please look at the blackboard.
（2）look for
eg：我在找我的笔
（3）look like
eg::你爸爸长什么样？
4） Good food and exercise
好的饮食和锻炼帮助我学得更好。
5）帮助某人做某事
6) be good for
7）be good at =do well in
8）be good to sb.
9) 和…相同
与……不同
不同: (n.)difference
eg.There are many (不同点)between the two pictures.
10) although虽然，尽管,引导让步状语从句，与 同义，但不能与 同时出现在一个复合句中，可与still, yet同用。
11) 保持健康： = be in good health =keep/ be healthy
4．拓展创新
注意sometimes与几个形似的词的区别。
A. sometime是副词，意为“在某个时候”，“某时”
B. sometimes:有时候是副词。
C. some time是名词词组，意为“一段时间”，做时间状语用
D.some times是名词词组，意为“几次，几倍”。
eg：（1）I met him in the street last month.
(2) Will you come again next week?
(3) I will stay here for
5．引导学生阅读3b的短文，填单词，完成3b的内容。
1要求学生写一篇短文，谈一谈自己的生活和饮食习惯。
2．要求学生口头谈一谈父亲或母亲的生活和饮食习惯。
3，引导学生做调查，完成下列任务。
Activitiesfrequency
a. go to the movies
b. watch TV
c. shop
d. exercise
e.read
F,listen to music
(设计说明)循序渐进学习目标语言Step10. Do some exercises.
综合能力训练P9自主学习
Step11. Summing-up
Stress the important phrases and sentences in this class.
Step12. Homework
介绍你自己：
四、教学反思：
学后反思：今天我学会了＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿
我还不明白的是：＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿
教后反思：＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿
＿＿＿＿＿
Unit 1 How often do you exercise？
第二课时Section B
一、教师寄语
A bold attempt is half success.（勇敢的尝试是成功的一半）
二、学习目标
知识目标：
Words:
milk, junk food, health, unhealthy, habit, exercise, most, result, try, different maybe, although,
Phrases:
junk food, as for, on weekends, no students, try to do, look after, kind of
Sentences:
1.But my mother wants me to drink it.
2.She says it’s good for my health
3.I try to eat a lot of vegetables.
4.Is her lifestyle the same as yours or different?
能力目标:
学会谈论饮食习惯。能了解哪些饮食习惯是健康的。能阅读介绍饮食习惯方面的文章。学会养成良好的生活习惯和饮食习惯。
情感目标:
培养学生的逻辑表述能力，激发学生的积极思维，并使学生互相了解，增进友谊，加强人际交往，以形成良好的人际关系。
三、教学重、难点
区分How many /how much, health/healthy, different/difference
四、学习过程
Step1. Free talk
同桌练习How often do you ……?及其回答
Step 2．1.Talk about the pictures. Practice the key words.完成1a
2. Pairwork Ask the Ss to show their works and perform it.
Step 3．Listening 完成2a,2b Check the answers
Step 4.合作探究
课文解析. 3a 3b
1.Warm up and Lead in: Say something about your eating habits
Talk about their eating habits.
2. Play the recorder. Listen and read 3a
3. Answer the questions .Try to answer these questions
4. Ask the Ss to sum up the language points Sum up the language points Textbook
5. Read and finish 3b Complete the article
讲解：
1.pretty:adj. 漂亮的.，美丽的 adv.很，相当
2. when:conj. 当…的时候. 引导时间状语从句
3. eating habits饮食习惯
4. try to do sth.尽力做/努力做…. Try doing sth.试图做….
5. look after 照顾=take care of ，关注，注重
6. get good grades:得到好的成绩
7. help sb. (to) do sth.
8. the same as和…相同
9. different (adj.)- (n.)difference good Cbetter-best
10. although虽然，尽管,引导让步状语从句，与though同义，但不能与but 同
时出现在一个复合句中，可与still, yet同用。
11. maybe:或许，大概,常放在句首
Step 5. 梳理归纳 Section B 词组归纳：
1) be good for 对什么有益 2) be bad for对什么有害
3) want to do sth 想做某事 4) want sb to do sth想某人做某事
4) 5)try to do sth 尽量做某事
6) come home from school放学回家
7) of course = certainly = sure当然
8）get good grades取得好成绩
9) some advice
10）hardly=not nearly / almost not几乎不
11) keep/be in good health保持健康
12）pretty healthy 相当健康
13) my eating habits 我的饮食习惯
14）drink milk 喝牛奶
15)so you see 正如你所看到的
16）look after 照顾
17)my healthy lifestyle 我的健康饮食习惯
18）help sb.do sth 帮助某人做某事
19)the same as 和….一样
20）be different from 与….不同
Step 6．达标检测 根据汉语意思完成下列各句，每空一词。
1. 做眼保健操对你的眼睛有好处。
Doing eye exercises _______ _______ _______ your eyes.
2. 我们尽量准时到达那里。
We _______ _______ get there on time.
3. 散步有助于保持健康。
Walking helps to keep ______ _______ ________.
4. ―你多长时间看一次电影？ ―我一个星期看两次。
― ______ _______ do you watch TV?
― I watch TV twice a week.
5. 每天运动对我们的健康有好处。
It’s good for our health ______ _______ every day.
Step7. 完成综训section B
Step8. 课后反思
我的收获：
我的不足：
我的疑问： 文章
延伸阅读：
The courseware role
The various teaching information suggested to learners;
(2) to provide information and information processing for the diagnosis, evaluation, prescription and learning of the learning process;
In order to improve learning motivation and motivation, it is used to strengthen the learning evaluation information of learning stimulation.
It is used to the learning data, to realize the teaching strategy and the control method of learning process control.
POWERPOINT is the best choice for teachers who have started their courseware theory and technology. Because the operation is very simple, most of the people can basically grasp at half a day. So, it can be beautiful idea on how to implement the case in the courseware design intent, how to enhance the effect of the courseware, as well as technical progress, is also a theoretical deepening, through the production of several related case, the concept of the courseware will be into the heart into the brain.
Multimedia courseware
Refers to the multimedia teaching courseware according to teacher's teaching plans, to describe the need of teaching content through the computer multimedia (video, audio, animation, images, text to describe and class requirements. Vivid, it can vividly describe various teaching problem, increase the atmosphere of classroom teaching, improve the students' interest in learning, to broaden the students' knowledge, in 10 years the means, is widely used in middle and primary school teaching is the inevitable trend of modern teaching development.
Electronic courseware advantage
Compared with traditional textbooks, electronic courseware has the advantage of the richness of resources and the autonomy of learning. Electronic courseware content is very rich, including textbooks, teaching plan, practice, self-test, reference books and related cases, etc., like a small library, brought great convenience to students' learning, students can grasp the learning progress according to their own specific conditions.
Electronic lesson plans
Lesson plan is to describe how to class, usually is a teacher of the written word, preparation before class is an important part of the first-line teachers teaching, plays a key role in the whole teaching activity, the preparation of achievements is form the lesson plan. However, traditional teaching cases are often a result of personal achievement, and teachers form teaching cases according to their understanding of the content of knowledge and teaching design, mainly in the word electronic documents or written form. The disadvantage is that it cannot be Shared and modified in time.
Electronic lesson plan design includes teaching material analysis, teaching design, review introduced, interaction between teachers and students, exercises to consolidate, etc.), blackboard writing, teaching reflection and other traditional link, also including courseware, such as links to database, friendship can give full play to the advantage of information technology new link. In a teaching case, full integration of the picture, the text, the sound, like the role of various media, stimulate students' interest in learning. Its biggest feature is to provide links, easy to call, vivid and intuitive.
课件作用
①向学习者提示的各种教学信息;
②用于对学习过程进行诊断、评价、处方和学习引导的各种信息和信息处理；
③为了提高学习积极性，制造学习动机，用于强化学习刺激的学习评价信息；
④用于更新学习数据、实现学习过程控制的教学策略和学习过程的控制方法。
对于课件理论、技术上都刚起步的老师来说，POWERPOINT是个最佳的选择。因为操作上非常简单，大部分人半天就可以基本掌握。所以，就可以花心思在如何在课件中贯彻案例的设计意图上、如何增强课件的实效性上，既是技术上的进步，也是理论上的深化，通过几个相关案例的制作，课件的概念就会入心入脑了。
多媒体课件
多媒体教学课件是指根据教师的教案，把需要讲述的教学内容通过计算机多媒体（视频、音频、动画）图片、文字来表述并构成的课堂要件。它可以生动、形象地描述各种教学问题，增加课堂教学气氛，提高学生的学习兴趣，拓宽学生的知识视野，来被广泛应用于中小学教学中的手段，是现代教学发展的必然趋势。
电子课件优势
电子课件与传统的教科书相比，它的优势在于资源的丰富性和学习的自主性。电子课件的内容非常丰富，包括课本、教案、练习、自测、参考书籍和相关案例等，就像一个小型图书馆，给学生的学习带来了极大的便利，学生可以根据自己具体情况自由把握学习的进度。
电子教案
教案是描述如何进行一堂课的教学，通常都是教师书面上的文字，课前备课是一线教师进行教学的重要环节，在整个教学活动中占有关键作用，备课的成果表现是形成教案。但传统的教案往往是个人成果，教师按照自己对知识内容的理解和教学设计而形成的教案，主要以word电子文档或书面形式来表现。其缺点是不能及时共享和修改。
电子教案的设计既包括教材分析、教学设计（复习引入、师生交流互动、练习巩固等）、板书、教学反思等传统环节，还包括课件、资料库、友情链接等能够充分发挥信息技术优势的新环节。即在一个教案中，充分整合图、文、声、像等各种媒体的作用，激发学生的学习兴趣。其最大的特点是提供链接，便于调用，生动直观。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇4
《新目标英语》的语言教育理念是：知识用于行动，强调“语言应用”，培养“创新、实践、能力”，发展“学习策略”。那么本节课作为unit4的section a，教材以how do you get to school?为中心话题，围绕“traffic way”展开，运用一般现在时。section a与学生的实际密切相关，易于引发学生用英语进行交际交流，完成听说读写的任务活动，我将灵活运用这些活动，将其中的一些活动进行变化或整合。
通过对本课的仔细诊断，把教学策略重点地位在三个教学环节上，即presentation ,practice and production上，将“激发兴趣，激活思维,轻松导入，读后仿说，逐层训练，强化能力，创设情景，迁移知识，实现目标”作为本课的设计导向。
二、teaching aims:
1、技能目标：学生能听懂本课录音；能听懂师生之间就本课内容而展开的一切形式的问答；会和别人展开对话，了解和传递信息；能将本课重难点理解透彻，灵活恰当运用；无大的语言错误；就类似话题创造性地自编对话，掌握比较级的用法。
2、知识目标：take subway train forty ninety hundred minute kilometer
how do you get to school? how long does it take?
3、情感目标：让学生感受到他们学习英语是为了在现实生活进行交流，而不单纯是为了英语课和应付考试而学习；让学生感受到他们是英语学习活动中的主体和中心，以此来激励他们在英语课上积极参与，追求创新，使学生爱学英语，爱说英语，想说口语。
4、学习策略目标：改变传统的.死记硬背，积极主动的投入到语言的实践中去，用英语去思考问题，在实践中提高语言的综合使用能力，加深对基础知识的掌握和记忆，学会使用brains storing 。
三、difficult and important points:
how do you get to school? i take the …/ride …/ walk…
how long does it take?
1 交际法和情景法教学。
2 以学生为中心和任务型教学，并辅助于tpr全身反应教学法及猜谜活动,调动各层次学生的自主能动性。
3 阅读文段的practice方法是：
？表层分析---复述应答：要求学生机械重复文段中的内容，使课文信息再现（是非题，课后问答题，图表填空题等）
？深层剖析---推断应答：要求学生利用信息凭借经验理解读物的“弦外之音”（指导性问题和细节性问题）
整体评价---自由交际：要求学生用所学知识，对新情景进行交际（教师选恰当的与课文相关和有关社会热点topics）
注：1、课前已分好组，已形成合作竞争探究的教学模式。
2、多媒体辅助：用flash软件将本课所要的动画、录音、图片、文字、图表和音乐制成cai软件，使抽象变得直观，实现生生互动，师生互动，人机互动多向交流。
ss : good morning , teacher.
t: i usually get to school by bike ,but sometimes on foot . how do you get to school?
t: very good . you’re clever. let’s learn unit 4 section a . 之后板书：“unit 4 how do you get to school?”
八年级新目标英语教案 篇5
新目标八年级英语上册教学导学案课件
Unit10Ifyougototheparty,you’llhaveagreattime
主备人：李丽审核：初二全体英语教师
第一课时SectionA1a—1c及语法
一．学习目标：1。本课时重要词组。2。if引导的条件状语从句的使用。
二．重难点：if引导的条件状语从句的使用。
三．学法指导：以学生自学为主，教师点拨，习题巩固。
四．本课时重要词组：
gotothepartywithsb与某人一起参加聚会
belate迟到besorry后悔letsbin让某人进入wearjeanstotheparty穿牛仔裤参加聚会
五.语法：
if引导的条件状语从句
1．含义与结构
If意为“如果”,可用来引导条件状语从句,带有条件状语的句子属于复合句,从句表示主句动作发生的前提或条件.结构:if+陈述句,主语+谓语(=主语+谓语+if+陈述句).如:
Ifyouaskhim,____________________.如果你问他,他会告诉你答案.
Youcanleavenowifyoulike.如果你愿意,现在就可以走了.
2.用法.If引导条件状语从句时,主句用一般将来时,从句则用一般现在时.同学们我们可以概括为“主将从现”如:
___________________,theywon’tclimbthehill.如果明天下雨,他们就不去爬山.If引导条件状语从句时,主句是祈使句时,从句也用一般现在时.如:
Ifhecomes,___________________.如果他来,请让我知道.
If引导条件状语从句时,主句是含有情态动词的句子,从句也要用一般现在时.如:___________________________ifyouisfat.如果你是胖的,你应该少吃肉.
注意引导宾语从句的if与引导条件状语从句的if的区别.引导宾语从句的if意为“是否”,相当于whether,宾语从句的时态要根据语境确定.如:
Idon’tknowifitwillraintomorrow我不知道明天是否会下雨.
专题训练:
1.Ifhe_____harder,hewillcatchupwithussoon.
A.studyB.studiesC.willstudyD.studied
2.Thereisgoingto____asportsmeetingnextweek,ifit____,we’llhavetocancelit.
A.be,willrainB.have,willrainC.be,rainsD.have,rains.
3.I’mwaitingformyfriend._________,I’llgoshoppingalone.
A.ifshecomesB.ifshewillcomeC.ifshedoesn’tcomeD.ifshedidn’tcome
4.Idon’tknowifshe______totheparty,ifshe______,I’lltellyou.
es,comesB.willcome,es,willcomeD.willcome,comes
5．-----Mary,whataboutgoingboating,ifit______tomorrow?------Goodidea
A.won’trainB.notrainC,doesn’trainD.willrain
6.ifthesnow_____we’llhavetostayathome.
A.stopsB.doesn’tstopC.willstop
用单词的适当形式填空.
1．Ifshe_________(finish)workearly,she___________(go)home.
2．Iftheweather________（be）fine，we___________(go)forawalk.
3.IfI__________(have)timetonight,I________(finish)thebookI’mreading.
4.Ifit________(rain)nextweekend,
we________(notbeableto)plantthevegetable.
5.Ifit_______(rain),we________(stay)athome
6.Ifshe______(arrive),she_________(phone)me.
7.Ifhe_____(call),tellhimI’llringback.
8.He_____(notspeak)toyouunlessyou_____(speak)tohimfirst.
9.Idon’tknowifit__________(rain)tomorrow.
Ifit__________(rain),we______________(notgo)toschool
六．本课时必默写课文1a.
第二课时SectionA2a—4
一．学习目标：1.重要词组.2.half与halfof的区别,whynot的使用,不定式作定语.
二．重难点：重点单词的使用.
三．学法指导：学生自学,教师点拨,多读多记.多习题训练
四．本课时重要词组：
studyforthetest为考试而学习makesomefood做一些食物playpartygames玩聚会游戏havetheparty举办聚会watchavideoattheparty在聚会上观看录像
agoodtimetohavetheparty举办聚会的好时间
bringfoodtotheparty带食物去参加聚会
therulesforschoolparies学校聚会的规则takeaway带走拿走friendsfromotherschools来自其他学校的朋友
asksbtodosth要求其人做某事
duringtheparty聚会期间
五，重点句子解析：
1．Whenisagoodtimetohavetheparty?什么时候举行聚会比较好。
其中tohavetheparty是不定式短语作定语修饰名词time，不定式短语作定语时通常要放在所修饰的词的后面。如：
Whenisagoodtime__________________?什么时候举行考试比较好？
Ihavelotsofthings_______.我有许多事情要做。
2．Ifwehaveittoday,halftheclasswon’tcome.
如果我们今天举行将有一半的学生不会来。
其中half意为“一半的'”一般要放在冠词之前。Eg:HalftheworkerscomeformShangdongHalfof?.意为“半数的。。。。”此结构作主语时谓语动词和介词of后的宾语在数上保持一致。即of后的名词或代词是单数，则谓语动词也用单数，如果of后的名词是复数则谓语动词也用复数。
Eg:____________________________fromChina半数的学生来自中国。
Halfofhislife_____spentmakinginventions他花了半辈子搞发明。
2．Don’tbringfoodtotheparty,ifyoudo,theteacherswilltakeitaway.其中takeaway是动副词组，如果这个短语中宾语是代词，代词必须放在中间，如果是名词可放在中间也可放在后面。
Whosebooksarethere?Please__________.这些书是谁的，请把它们拿走。Pleasetakeyourbooksaway=______________________
Bring?to?=_____________意为___________反义短语为_________=_______________针对性练习：
1。Ithinkthathalftheclass______withyou
A.toagreeB.agreeingC.agreeD.agrees.
2.halfofhisbooks______writteninenglish.
A.isB.areC.haveD.has
3.halftheclass_____________(sing)now
4.halfofthesebananas____________(be)bad.
5.Marchisagoodtime_________________(visit)China
6.Whydoyouputthetrashhere?Itsmellsterrible_______please.
A.takeitawayB.bringitawayC.takethemaway
7.Ihavesomething_______ifyouwanttoknowaboutourfactory.
A.tosayB.totalkC.sayingD.talking
六．本课时必背课文：2c3a.
第三课时SectionBandselfcheck
一.学习目标:1.重要词组,2.重点句子解析
二.重难点:词组.Takepartin与join的区别,famous的使用
三.学法指导:学生自学,老师点拨,多背多做习题.
四.本课时重要词组:
Gotocollege去上大学
befamousas/for作为/因为?.而著名
travelaroundtheworld全世界旅行
getaneducation受教育
becomeaprofessionalsoccerplayer成为一名职业足球运动员
seemlike似乎好像
adreamjob一个梦想中的工作
makealiving谋生
allovertheworld全世界
givemoneytoschoolsandcharities为学校和慈善机构捐钱
doalotofworktohelppeople做大量的工作去帮助人们
allthetime一直,总是
followyoueverywhere到处跟随着你
getinjured受伤becomerich变得富裕
haveadifficulttimedoingsth做某事有困难,费力做某事
mobilephone手机
theclassparty=theclassmeeting班会
toomuch太多muchtoo太
laughatsb嘲笑某人
五.本课时重点句子解析:
1.Ifyoubecomeaprofessionalathlete,you’llbeabletomakealivingdoingsomethingyoulove.如果你成为一名专业运动员，你就能做自己喜欢的事情来谋生。
makeone’sliving又作makealiving,意为“谋生”。如：
Hehadto____________whenhewastenyearsold.
当他十岁的时候，他不得不靠自己谋生。
Hisfathermakesaliving______________
他的爸爸靠卖面包为生。
Evensowecouldhardlymakeahand-to-mouthliving.
即使这样，我们也只能勉强糊口。
2.Manyprofessionalathletesgetinjured.
许多专业运动员受伤了。
injure作动词，意为“受伤”如摔伤，骨折，侧重指损害健康、成就、容貌。
Smokingcaninjureourhealth.
吸烟有害健康。
Thatlittleboyfelloffthebikeandinjuredhisleftleg.
那个小男孩儿从自行车上摔下来，伤了他的左腿。
针对性习题:
1.she_________theLeague(团)in1948.(加入)
2.Willyougivehimachance______theimportantmeetingtomorrow?
A.joinB.takepartinC.tojoinD.totakepartin
3.Hangzhouisfamous______itsbeautifulscenery(风景).
4.YaoMingisfamous_______abasketballstar.
5.Parisisfamous_______itsfashions(时尚)
6.Lasaisfamous______thesuncity
7.Theyhaveadifficulttime_________(work)itout
8.wheredidyou________yourholidaylastyear?
9.Jimspentthreeyears________(learn)ChinesebeforehecametoChina
10.Don’tspent___________timewatchingTV.(用muchtoo和toomuch填空)
11.Theclassroomis______________dirty,weshouldcleanitatonce.(同10题)六:本课时必背课文:3a3c.
单元习题训练:
1.What____ifIlistentomusicinclass?
A.happensB.willhappenC.ishappeningD.happened
2.IfI_____theretomorrow,I______you.
A.willgo;willcallB.go;callC.willgo;callD.go;willcall
3.Theoldmanwantedme_____himmyticket.
A.ed
4.Canyoutellmewhenagoodtime_____Englishis?
A.studyB.studyingC.tostudyD.studies
5.Theyoungmanmakesalivingby_____everyday.
A.fishB.tofishC.fishingD.fished
6.Ifit________tomorrow,we__________gotothepark.
A.rains,won’tB.willrain,won’tC.rains,don’tD.rains,don’tgo
7.Howabout_________ascarf?A.buyB.buyingC.boughtD.tobuy
8.IwilllethimknowifI_______him.A.sawB.seeC.seeingD.see
八年级新目标英语教案 篇6
【学习目标】
学会用将来时态预言。
【重点、难点】
1.will 构成的一般将来时态的陈述句、否定句、疑问句及回答。
2. There be 句型的一般将来时。
【导学指导】
温故知新 小组讨论设想未来世界的变化。运用be going to谈论将来的'计划和打算。
自主互助学习
知识剖析：
一般将来时态
构成: will / be going to +动词原形
1.用be going to do表示将来：主要意义，一是表示“意图”，即打算在最近的将来或将来进行某事。
Are you going to post that letter? I am going to book a ticket.
另一意义是表示“预见”，即现在已有迹象表明将要发生或即将发生某种情况。
It’s going to rain.
2.用will/ shall do表示将来：
You will feel better after taking this medicine. 助动词will+动词原形
I will not lend the book to you. 变否定句直接在will后加not
She will come to have class tomorrow.
Will she come to have class tomorrow? 变一般疑问句，直接把will提到句首。
Yes,she will/ No.she won’t .
3. fewer 与less及more表数量的用法。
1)few(形容词)“几乎没有，很少的”，修饰可数名词。其比较级、最高级为规则变化：
few-fewer-fewest“a few”表示“一些”“few”带否定含义，“几乎没有”。
2)little(形容词)“很少的，几乎没有的”(“小的，幼小的”)，修饰不可数名词。其比较级、最高级为不规则变化：little-less-least。例：There will be less pollution.
“a little”表“一些”，“little”带否定含义，“几乎没有”。
3)many“许多”，修饰可数名词。much“许多”，修饰不可数名词。
比较级、最高级为不规则变化：many / much -more-most。
重点难点释义:
1. In ten years 十年后 In+一段时间：…..之后
in 5 months :5个月后 in 3 years: 3年后 in a week: 一周后
I′ll be a reporter in ten years.十年后我会是一个记者
学习过程：
1.小组看图1a，完成下列对话。
A: Will people have ________ in their homes?
B: Yes, ________ ________. I think every home will have one.
2. 小组合作讨论预测未来世界的变化完成1a 。
3. 小组合作训练 1)will 构成的一般将来时态的陈述句、否定句、疑问句及回答。
2)There be 句型的一般将来时。
4. 听力技能提高。
1)听录音完成1b 。 2)听前预测2a/2b 。 3) 听录音完成2a/2b 。
5.综合运用能力提高。
小组合作运用将来时的句型对未来作出预测。完成1c/2c 。
【课堂练习】
一、根据汉语意思，完成句子。一空一词。
1. 书籍将会仅仅在电脑，而不在纸上。
Books _____ only _____ on computers, not _____ paper.
Will _____ _____ trees and _____ pollution in the city in future.
3.你认为人们家里将会有机器人吗?
Do you will be in people’s homes?
4. 他们不会去野营。我确信他们将来参加我们的聚会。
They _____ go . They _____ come to our party, I’m sure.
5.1后孩子们还要去上学吗?---不,他们将不用上学.
------ kids go to school 100 years
------ No, they
【要点归纳】
1.will 构成的一般将来时态的陈述句、否定句、疑问句及回答。
2. There be 句型的一般将来时。
【拓展练习】
一、单项选择
( )1.I ________ rockets to the moon when I grow up.
A. will put B. will fly C. will take
( )2.If there are ________ trees, the air in our city will be ________ cleaner.
A. less; more B. more; more C. more; much
( )3.I predict he will be an engineer ________ ten years because he is so interested
in making things.
A. in B. afterC. later
( )4.There were many famous predictions that never ________ .
A. come true B. came real C. came true
( )5.“The work of Picasso will never be ________ anything, ”someone said.
A. costB. worth C. spend
【总结反思】
八年级新目标英语教案 篇7
Step 1 Learn to read the words on p127
1. Look at the new words and try to read them in pairs.
2. Let one student to read them out .
3. Correct the pronunciation.
Step 2 : Learn to rem ember words on p 103
一. Remember the words by looking at pictures.
二. Remember the words by matching itself with its meaning.
三. Remember the words by th eir similar pronunciations and forms.
1. myself yourself herself himself
1. possible （可能的） impossible（不可能的）
2. bored（无聊的.,修饰人） boring（无聊的，修饰物）
3.interview （动词，采访） interviewer（名词，采访者）
五.Remember the words by their Chinese.
听写单词，老师提学 生默。不会的，再 记忆，默写。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇8
第一课时 l 教师设计 教学步骤 建议和说明 K热身/复习（Warm-up/Revision） enjoy the movie （let’s travel） a. 教师播放录音，师生一起吟唱并观看。 b. 请学生watch the screen进行问答。如： what did I do yesterday? What did I do on vocation? What did Sam do three days ago? pairs work:“what did he/ she/ they do on last school trip？” K呈现/操练（Presentation/Practice） 教学句型“Did you go to the zoo?” a. guessing game:” What did Sam do on his last school trip? T: what did Sam do on his last school trip? Do you know? S: did he ……..? 教学地点名词aquarium, science center, gift shop, museum, 和动物名词dolphin, seal ,shark, octopus。实际情景中会运用询问和谈论过去发生的事情。 a Do you know the animals in the aquarium? (3 minutes) (Videotapes, flash) Get Ss to watch a short movie to teach the animals in the aquarium. ( The key words: aquarium, shark, seal, crab, octopus, shell, starfish, fish) b Task One--- Test your memory (3 minutes) (Pictures) i. Give Ss 30 seconds to remember the 9 pictures on the screen. ii.Test their memories by using “Were there …?”or “Did you see …?”to ask and answer. w pairs work (were there any books in the classroom yesterday? 1c .Listening (5 minutes) (Audio cassette, the recorder) Have Ss listen to the tape and do the listening exercises on Page 47 1b. Encourage Ss to give the answers by having a competition among them K拓展/巩固（Extension/Consolidation） . Interview (10 minutes) (Photos, the projector) i Have Ss bring their own photos. The photos should be about their last trips. Ask the students in Group 1 to exchange the photos with the students in Group 2. So does Group 3 & Group 4. ii Suppose the students in Group 2 and Group 4 are famous persons. Give the students in Group 1 and Group 3 three minutes to interview the famous persons according to the photos. iii Call out some to act it out. See who are the best actor and actress. (Here are some suggestions for the reporters to interview the famous persons.) I am a reporter from CCTV-9. Now I am going to interview …, How was your last trip? Did you go …? /Where did you go? Were there …? What did you do there? Did you see … there? Did you buy a souvenir? Did people there ask for your autograph? v完成《作业本》中相应的练习。 wHomework a. 学生在家听录音跟读。 b. 抄写本课时出现的地点名词aquarium, science center, gift shop, museum, 和动物名词dolphin, seal ,shark, octopus。 c. 采访并做好记录，下节课要向学生做汇报。 在动画片中调动学生情感，营造氛围，导入主题。让学生通过watch and answer来培养学生的语言能力和听力能力并有意识地复习前面学过一般过去发生的事情。使学生在完成任务的同时能有效地复习了前面学过的动词。 真实的情景使学生易学会aquarium, science center, gift hop, museum, 和动物名词dolphin, seal ,shark, octopus。 Students like new challenge, so testing their memory will arouse their interest. And this task provides speaking practice using the target language “Were there …?” “Did you see …?” 此时知识的.适当拓展对学生来说容易接受有不觉得突然。 真实的环境，激起了孩子们说的欲望；难度适中的任务，使大部分孩子有体验成功的机会。因此也容易进入新课的教学。Students are curious to know the places their classmates traveled, so this task gives them the chances to use the target language “Did you go …?” 视觉上的差异能突出重点，容易吸引孩子们的注意力。 该活动非常简单，可以使每个学生都有能力参加。 真实的环境有助于孩子们语言的输出。 最后，让学生在优美的旋律中结束本课的教学，并达到巩固的目的。 II. Blackboard design Unit 8 How was your school trip? I. New words & phrases II. Sentence patterns aquarium What did you do …? shark Did you …? seal Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t octopus Were there …? souvenir Yes, there were. /No, there weren’t. autograph III. Competition Group 1 Group 2 Group3 Group 4
八年级新目标英语教案 篇9
1.学生能掌握短语：junk food，begood for，eat fruit，drink coffee。
2.学生能听懂谈论生活习惯的对话，培养自己的听力技能。
3.通过了解各自的日常生活习惯，提升自己良好的生活习惯，形成良好的师生关系。
【学习重点】
用所学的功能语言，与学生交流日常生活习惯。
【学习难点】
听力训练，提高学生的综合听说能力
Learning action tips：
Revise the knowledge learned and let students know the importance ofdeveloping a healthy diet habit by this step.
Learning action tips：
Preview the words on Page 12. Read the words by phonetic symbols, thenunderline new words in the text and mark their Chinese meaning. At last finish thetask in 1a.
【Method coach】
▲health和healthy的用法
health n.健康;人的身体(或精神)状态
healthy adj.健康的
keep healthy=be in good health保持健康
【导练】
锻炼能帮助你保持健康。
Exercise can help you to__keep__healthy/be__in__good__health.
Task 2
Learning action tips：
Listen to the tape and finish the task in 1c,listen again and finish the task in 1d.Students imitate the listening contents andpractice the dialogue in role, ask a few pairs to act out.情景导入 生成问题
1.T：Doyou like junk food?
S：________________________________________________________________________
2.T：Howoften do you eat it?
S：________________________________________________________________________
3.T：Ithink ________________ You should ____________.
S：________________________________________________________________________
自学互研 生成能力
Task1 Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.
1.I can read.(我会读)
junk food，be good for，eat fruit，drink coffee，health，healthy
2.I can write.(我会写)
翻译下列短语和句子。
(1)垃圾食品junk__food
(2)喝咖啡drink__coffee
(3)我妈妈想让我喝它。My__mother__wants__me__to__drink__it.
(4)我每天晚上睡几个小时?How__many__hours__do__you__sleep__every__night?
(5)你多久吃一次垃圾食品?How__often__do__you__eat__junk__food?
3.I can use.(我会用)
be good for对……有好处
be bad for对……有害
【拓展】
复习七年级的两个短语：
be good at擅长于=do well in
be good with对……有办法;与……相处得好
( D )Theold man likes walking with his dog after supper.He’s good ________ his dog.
A.forB.ofC.atD.with
Task2 Let’slisten to the tape and finish 1c，1d.
Task3 Makeconversations about your eating habits.
1.I can practice.(我会练)
A：How often do you (1)exercise(锻炼)?
B：I do it (2)every__day(每天).
A：Do you like exercise?
B：No. But my mother lets me do it.Shesays it is (3)good__for(有益)my health.
2.I can make conversations.(我会编对话)
你能结合课文内容编写对话，来介绍自己的生活习惯吗?
A：How often do you eat junk food?
B：Once a week. How about you?
A：I like it，but my mother thinks it’s bad for my health.So she doesn’t let me eat it. I only eat it once a week，too.
【Method coach】
听录音时，要求学生注意用笔标记：
(1)断句：“|”
(2)语调：升调 降调
(3)重读单词：△
(4)不会认读的单词：____
模仿纯正的语音语调，朗读听力材料，培养学生的语言交际能力。
Task 3
Learning action tips：
1.Read 1a and 1b, and have a dialogue practice with“How often do you…?”
2.Have an interview among the students in groups about the frequency ofdoing these activities according to the activity in 1a. Then write a passage tointroduce a student about the frequency of doing those activities(They can use thesentences：How often do you drink milk?/Doyou often drink milk or drink coffee?)
eg：__ drinks milk every day，he/she usually…
【Method coach】
在编对话时，学会创设情境来表演对话。
【备注】
3.I can summarize.(我会总结)
(1)询问做某事的频率的句型及回答：
—How__oftendo you do your homework?—I do my homework everyday.
(2)询问可数名词的数量的句型及回答：
—How__manyhours do you sleep every day?—Nine hours.
(3)询问不可数名词的数量的句型及回答：
—How__muchrice do you need?—Just a little.
(4)询问距离多远的句型及回答：
—How__faris it from your home to school?—Two kilometers.
交流展示 生成新知
Preshow：Show in groups. (Time：six minutes)
Task1: Firstread the words and phrases in groups，thenread together and sum up the usage of the words in groups，mark the difficult words in pronunciationand understanding(students can ask teacher for help).At last，write them on the blackboard.
Task3: Firstthe students discuss and check the answers in Task 3, then discuss and set scenesto perform the dialogues and introduce their own living habits. At last write themon the blackboard.
Promotionshow：Class show. (Time：sixteen minutes)
Task1：1.Ican read.(1)Readtogether, pay attention to the pronunciation of “health”and “healthy”;(2)Distinguish the meaning of “health”and “healthy” with method coach;(3)Consolidate the wordsby word games.
2.I can write.(1)Translate the phrasesinto English or Chinese by answering quickly;(2)Readtogether;(3)Spot test：consolidate the usage of the phrasesby making sentences.
3.I can use.(1)Distinguish the usageof the phrases with the similar ones;(2)Spot test：consolidate the usage ofthe phrases with exercises, then check the answers by answering quickly and explain.
Task3：1.Ican practice.(1)Choosesome students to translate the key sentences in Task 3;(2)Read together.
2.I can makeconversations.(1)Makedialogues according to the task;(2)Set scenes to performthe dialogues;(3)Question students randomlyaccording to the dialogues.
3.I can summarize.(1) Sum up the sentencesof“how”with“I can summarize” and answer, then write them on the blackboard;(2)Explain them in class with spottest;(3)Read together.
当堂演练 达成目标
按要求完成下列各句，每空一词。
1.Bill’s grandpa goes fishing everyweek.(改为一般疑问句)
Does Bill’s grandpa go fishing everyweek?
2.The old woman is in good health.(改为同义句)
The old woman ishealthy.
3.We stay at school eight hoursevery day.(对画线部分提问)
How many hoursdo you stay at school every day?
4.He watches TV once__a__day.(对画线部分提问)
How often does he watchTV?
5.My cousin never eats__candies.(对画线部分提问)
What does your cousinnever eat?
课后反思
查漏补缺收获：________________________________________________________________________
存在困惑：_____________________________________________________________________
八年级新目标英语教案 篇10
《新目标八年级上册英语教案》详细具体且生动
《新目标八年级上册英语教案》是一本帮助八年级学生提高英语听、说、读、写能力的教材。该教材结合了现代教育理念和国际化教育趋势，内容丰富多样，充满趣味性，在教学实践中广受好评。本文将详细、具体且生动地介绍该教材的特点、教学目标和教学方法。
首先，新目标八年级上册英语教案的特点是全面、系统性强。该教材包含了八个单元，每个单元的内容涵盖了语法、词汇、听力、口语、阅读和写作等方面。从语言技能的培养出发，设计了一系列有针对性的练习和活动，使学生在全方位、多角度地开展英语学习，提高综合语言能力。
其次，新目标八年级上册英语教案的教学目标是灵活、实用性强。该教材以培养学生的语言运用能力和交际能力为目标，注重学生的实际语言应用能力培养。在每个单元中，教学目标既强调语言基础知识的掌握，又注重语言技能的训练，如听力、口语和阅读等。通过多种情景对话和交际活动，培养学生在实际生活中运用英语的能力。
新目标八年级上册英语教案的教学方法注重互动、启发式教学。在教学过程中，教师采用多种教学方法，如讲授法、演示法、情景模拟法等，激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性。教师还注重培养学生的自主学习能力和合作意识，通过小组合作学习、角色扮演等活动，激发学生的创造力和合作精神。
除了上述特点、教学目标和教学方法外，《新目标八年级上册英语教案》还有一些其他值得注意的亮点。首先，该教材注重培养学生的跨文化交际能力，通过介绍不同国家的文化习俗和民间故事等内容，促使学生对不同文化的理解和尊重。同时，该教材也注重培养学生的学习策略和思维能力，通过综合训练、思维导图和情景模拟等方式，培养学生的英语学习方法和思维习惯。
总之，《新目标八年级上册英语教案》全面、系统性强，教学目标灵活、实用性强，教学方法注重互动、启发式教学。通过该教材的学习，学生能够在全方位的英语学习中提高听、说、读、写能力，培养跨文化交际能力和学习思维能力。同时，教材内容丰富多样，充满趣味性，能够激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性。因此，《新目标八年级上册英语教案》是一本优秀的教学资源，对提高八年级学生的英语水平具有重要意义。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇11
新目标八年级上册英语教案课件
在现代教育中，教师利用多媒体教学是非常常见的方法。其中，使用教案和课件是非常重要的教学资源，能够帮助教师进行系统、有序的教学。本文将详细介绍新目标八年级上册英语教案课件，以及其在教学中的作用和优势。
首先，新目标八年级上册英语教案课件是根据课程标准和教材编写而成的。教案是教师在备课时制定的教学计划和方案，用于指导教学。课件是教案的具体呈现形式，通过使用多媒体软件制作而成，包含教案中的教学内容、活动设计、图片、视频等。教案课件的编写需要结合教学内容和学生的特点，既要符合教学目标，又要具有趣味性和吸引力，以激发学生的学习兴趣。
其次，新目标八年级上册英语教案课件在教学中具有许多优势。首先，教案课件可以使教学更加直观和生动。通过插入图片、幻灯片、视频等多媒体元素，能够更好地展示教学内容，帮助学生更好地理解和记忆知识点。其次，教案课件可以提高教学效率。教师可以在课件中预先设置好教学步骤和时间安排，使教学过程更加有序和紧凑。同时，教师可以灵活运用多媒体资源，快速调取相关内容，使教学过程更加高效。最后，教案课件可以激发学生的学习兴趣。多媒体元素的运用使教学更加生动有趣，吸引学生的注意力，提高学习积极性和主动性。
对于学生而言，新目标八年级上册英语教案课件也有许多益处。首先，教案课件可以提供多样化的学习材料和资源。在课件中，可以包含文字、图片、音频、视频等不同形式的资源，满足学生多样化的学习需求。其次，教案课件可以帮助学生更好地理解和掌握知识点。通过直观的图示和生动的动画，学生可以更加清晰地理解抽象概念和语言规则。此外，教案课件还可以提供互动式学习环境，促进学生的参与和合作，培养他们的学习能力和创新精神。
总之，新目标八年级上册英语教案课件是现代教学中一种非常重要的教学资源。它不仅能够提高教学效率和质量，激发学生的学习兴趣，还能满足学生多样化的学习需求，促进他们的全面发展。因此，教师应充分利用教案课件，结合自身的教学经验和学生的实际情况，合理设计和运用教学资源，推动教育教学的创新和发展。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇12
Unit1 Where did you go on vacation
2，掌握重点句型：Where did you go on vacation?
Did you go anywhere interesting?
1. 任何人______________________2. 任何地方____________________3.精彩的__________________
4.很少____________________ 5.大多数_____________________6. 某物;某事__________________
7.没有什么____________________8.每人___________________9.我自己__________________________
10. 你自己____________________11. 母鸡_________________12.猪_____________________________
13.好像______________________14.厌烦的___________________15.某人_________________________
1. 相当多____________________2. 去度假___________________3.为考试而学_________________
4.照相____________________5.购物_____________________6.记日记__________________________
7.当然__________________8.夏令营_________________9.出去___________________________
10.第一次______________________11.在农村_________________________
【合作探究】请预习1单元 Section A 的内容，掌握并完成下列知识。
一. anyone 意为____________. 是指人不定代词。某人________, 每个人_________, 没有人__________. 当形容词修饰不定代词时，要后置。
Eg: 1. Is there ________at home? 有人在家吗?
2. Is there _________ _________ in school today? 今天学校有重要的人吗?
【扩展】:不定代词还有指物不定代词：某件事(东西)___________, 任何事(东西)_________, 所有事(东西)_____________，没有事(东西)______________.
还有一些副词：任何地方_________, 某个地方____________, 每个 地方____________,无处__________.
归类：当形容词修饰这些不定代词和副词时， 要______________.
Eg: 1. You can go ________ _________, if you like. 如果你喜欢，你可以去任何有趣的地方。
2. I want to tell you _________ ________ about my vacation.我想告诉你有关我假期的一些特殊的事情。
二. few 意为__________, 修饰___________名词, 倾向于否定。
固定搭配：_____________.修饰_________________名词. 倾向于肯定。
little 意为_____________,修饰___________名词, 倾向于否定。
固定搭配：_____________.修饰_________________名词. 倾向于肯定。
quite a few 表示相当多， 修饰___________名词。quite a little表示相当多，修饰__________名词.
Eg: 1. Tom is happy be cause he has _______ _______ friends here. 汤姆很开心因为他在这有一些朋友。
2. ______people like talking with the bad boy. 很少人愿意和那个坏孩子说话。
3. There is _______ ______milk left in the bottle. 瓶子里还剩一点牛奶。
4. There is _______ food in the fridge and you should buy some. 冰箱里几乎没食物了，你应该买一些。
5. There are ______ _____ ______people at the us stop waiting for the bus.公共汽车站有很多人在等车。
6. There’s still _______ ___ ______ milk in the cup. 杯子里仍然有不少牛奶。
三.most adj. _________. most 修饰名词，most of+名词，意为：大部分…,作主语时谓语动词的单复数取决于名词的单复数。
Eg: 1. _______ ________ are studying English hard now. 现在大多数学生都在努力学习英语。
2. I think most of the food ________ (be) delicious.
四.myself 意为：___________. 是反身代词，在句中作同位语或宾语。其它反身代词，我自己:_______,你自己：_______, 他自己_________，她自己________，它自己________，我们自己________，你们自己___________他们自己___________.
固定短语：teach myself 我自学 enjoy oneself 过得愉快 by myself 我亲自…
I. 单项选择。
( )1. ---Kate, I’m going on business. Please look after _______well. ---Don’t worry, Mom. I will.
A. herself B. myself C. yourself D. himself
( )2. I’d like to go _____________ on vacation.
A. nowhere interesting B. interesting anywhere C. somewhere interesting D. interesting somewhere
( )3. ----How was your weekend? ----Very good! I ______the Science Museum with my classmates.
A. visit B. visited C. am visiting D. will visit
( )4. She is new here, so we know ______ about her.
A. nothing B. something C. anything D. everything
( )5. I can’t find my watch, but it must be ______in this room.
A. everywhere B. nowhere C. anywhere D. somewhere
( )6. Everyone ______I come form Sichuan. Actually(事实上), I come from S handong.
A. find B. think C. finds D. thinks
( )7. ---Did you have a good weekend? ---______. We enjoyed ourselves in the park .
A. I’m afraid not B. I don’t think so C. Of course D. I hope not
( )8. ----Where is my notebook? ---I don’t know. It isn’t here. Maybe _____took it away by mistake.(错误)
A. everybody B. nobody C. anybody D. somebody
( )9. ----How was your trip? ----______. I hope I can go there again.
A. Just so-so B. Not very good C. Nothing special D. Wonderful
( )10. He is a famous(的) cook. This dish tastes ______.
A. very well B. good C. well D. bad
II. 用词的正确形式填空。
1. More and more __________(visit) come to visit China these years.
2. I’m going to go _______(shop) for clothes at the Fashion Parade Store today.
3. The farmer keeps 50 p_______ on the farm every year.
4. It was raining hard. But I left my u__________ at school.
5. Health depends on good food and e_________sleep.
III. 用方框中词的适当形式填空。feed, anything, of course, buy, work
6. Do you have___________ important to say?
7. My father _________me an interesting storybook yesterday.
8. They picked leaves from the tree, and ______them to some little white worms.(虫子)
9. However cold it was, we still went on ________.
10. ---Do you feel like going to see a movie? ----___________.
Unit1 Where did you go on vacation第2课时
2，掌握重点句型：Where did you go on vacation?
Did you go anywhere interesting?Did you go out with anyone?
【课前预习】预习Section A, 提炼以下词组。
1. 待在家里 ________________ 2. 去纽约_________________3. 去参加夏令营___________________
4. 去山区___________________ 5. 去动物园 ________________6. 和其他人一起去________________
7. 买一些特别的东西_____________________8. 遇到一些有趣的人______________________________
9. 好久不见__________________10. 好多照片________________11. 大部分时间__________________
12. 黄果树瀑布__________________13. 喂鸡__________________14. 一些小猪仔_________________
15. 现在再见吧!_________________16. 记日记________________17. 没有人____________________
I.No one was here. 译：_______________________.
no one意思：________.与no body同义，做主语时，谓语动词用__________形式。且不能与of连用。
none意为没有，既指人又指物，可与of连用。谓语单，复形式皆可。none可做答语，表示一个没有。
Eg: (1) No one ___________(知道) the answer to the question.
(2) _________went swimming last weekend because of the bad weather.
A. Someone B. No one C. Everyone D. Nothing
(3) ---How many books do you have? ----_______.A. No one B. No a C. No body D. None
(4) _____of the students knows what Mr Brown likes. A. No one B. None C. Someone D. Anyone
2. Still no one seemed to be bored. 译:_______________________________.
seem是系动词。意为：____________. seem后接名词，形容词作表语。Seem like…似乎像…
Eg: (1). It ________(seem) a lovely cat. 它看来是只可爱的猫。
(2) You _________very _________. 你好像很生气。
( 3) It _________ a _______ ______.这好像是个好主意。
(4)That funny actor ______ ________ a clown(小丑)。那个滑稽的演员似乎像个小丑。
【知识链接】seem to do sth 似乎要、好像要做某事 It seems that…似乎、看起来…
Eg: (1). He seems ________ ______ ______./ It _______ ______ he is sad. 他似乎很伤心。
(2) The girl seems ____ ______ her homework on time./ It ______ _____ she finishes her homework on time.
3 I just stayed at home most of the time to read and relax. 译：_________________________________.
此句中，to read and relax 做___________成分。及动词不定式在句中做状语。
Eg: (1). Many visitors come to China __________(visit) the Great Wall.
(2). My sister often goes to the Children’s Palace __________(learn) the piano.
(3.) My family want to the countryside _________(see) my grandma last weekend.
4. Why didn’t you buy anything for yourself? 译：_____________________________________.
Why don’t/doesn’t/didn’t+人称+do…? = Why not do…? 表示某人为什么不做某事呢，是一种建议。
Eg: (1) _______ _______ _______go home with me?= ________ ______go home with me?
(2) Why not _______ for a walk after dinner? A. go B. goes C. to go D. going
【拓展】表示建议的句型：What about ….? How about…? Let’s do…。
翻译：你为什么不读书呢?Why don’t you________ ________? Why not _______ _______?
Let’s _______ _______. What about _________ __________? How about _______ _______?
I. 单项选择。
( )1. ----How many birds can you see in the tree? ----_____. All the birds have flown away.
A. None B. No one C. Nothing D. A few
( )2. The pizza ______good. I’d like some more. A. turns B. sounds C. feels D. tastes
( )3. ---Hi, Betty. Your skirt looks beautiful.---______.
A. Oh, really? B. Oh, no C. Don’t say that D. Thanks a lot.
( )4.---- Jack, is there _______in today’s newspaper? ---No, nothing.
A. anything important B. something important C. important anything D. important something
( )5. After a long walk in the sun, they wanted to drink _______.
A. cold something B. something cold C. nothing cold D. cold anything
( )6. ---Bob,it’s getting cold outside. _____take a jacket? ---Ok, mom.
A. Why do you B. Why not C. Why did you D. Why not do you
( )7. ---I feel tired and sleepy. ----Why not stop______for a while?A. rest B. to rest C. resting D. rested
( )8. She is ____ busy, and she has not finished her work______.
A. still; still B. yet; still C. still; yet D. yet; yet
( )9. ____that they didn’t know the news.A. It seems B. It seemed C. They seem D.They seemed
( )10. Everything for her ______not important. A. are B. is C. am D. be
( )11. ____of them like playing chess because it’s too difficult.
A. None B. No one C. Someone D. Anyone
Thousands of years ago. There was a very clever king with the name of Soloman. There are many stories about him. Here is one of them which shows how clever he was. Once there were two women. They lived in the same house, and each had a baby. One night, one of the babies died, and its mother took the other woman's child, and put it in her own bed instead (代替). The next morning they had a quarrel(吵架). ”No, this is my child, the dead one is yours, “ said the other. Each one wanted the living baby, but no one could tell whom it belonged to(属于) So they went to see King Solomon. When King Solomon heard their story, he said, ”Bring me a knife, cut the child in two, and give each woman one half. “ ”That's very fair(公平), oh, bright King!“ said the dead baby's mother. ”Give her my child, let it be hers, but don't kill the child. Oh, King!“ cried the other woman in tears(流泪). Then King Solomon pointed to the woman in tears and said, ”Give the child to her, for she is its mother. "
1. The two women in the same house each had a child. ( )
2. One night the two babies died. ( )
3. The two women quarreled(吵架) because Solomon killed their babies. ( )
4. Solomon came to see the mothers after their babies died. ( )
5. King Solomon cut the living child in two and gave each woman one half. ( )
八年级新目标英语教案 篇13
《新目标八年级上册英语教案及反思》
引言：
新目标八年级上册英语教案是教师教学的指南和教学活动的计划。通过对教案的详细编写和反思，教师可以更有效地组织教学内容和教学过程，提高学生的学习效果。在本文中，将详细讨论新目标八年级上册英语教案的编写及反思，以便教师更好地开展英语教学工作。
一、新目标八年级上册英语教案编写
1. 教学目标的设定：教师根据课程标准和学生的实际情况，确立教学目标。教学目标应具体明确，能够指导学生的学习。
2. 教学内容的安排：根据教学要求和学生的学习水平，教师将教学内容进行有机的梳理和整合，合理分配每个单元的教学时间，确保课时的充足。
3. 教学方法的选择：教师要根据教学内容和学生的学习特点，选择适合的教学方法和学习策略，使学生在积极参与中掌握知识和技能。
4. 教学过程的设计：教师将教学内容按照逻辑顺序进行分解和组织，设计出扎实的教学过程，确保教学的连贯性和系统性。
5. 学习评估的方式：教师设计科学的学习评估方式，包括形成性评价和终结性评价，以检测学生的学习情况和教学效果。
二、新目标八年级上册英语教案的反思
1. 教学目标的反思：教师要不断反思教学目标是否合适，是否能够顺利指导学生的学习，是否需要进行修正和调整。
2. 教学方法的反思：教师要关注学生的学习状态和反馈信息，及时调整教学方法，提供更合适的教学方式和策略。
3. 教学过程的反思：教师要及时反思和总结教学过程中的不足和问题，不断改进和完善教学过程，提高教学的效果。
4. 学习评估的反思：教师要审查学习评估方式的科学性和可行性，确保评估结果能够真实反映学生的学习情况。
结语：
新目标八年级上册英语教案的编写和反思是教师提高教学质量的关键环节。通过对教案的详细编写和反思，教师可以更好地组织教学内容和教学过程，提高教学效果，帮助学生更好地学习英语。然而，教案编写和反思只是教师教学的一部分，教师还需要具备扎实的英语知识、丰富的教学经验和灵活的教学方法，才能更好地为学生提供优质的英语教学。希望本文能够对教师开展新目标八年级上册英语教学工作有所启发和帮助。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇14
新目标八年级上册英语教案及反思
引言：
英语作为一门重要的国际交流语言，对于学生的学习和发展具有重要意义。《新目标八年级上册英语教案及反思》是一个对于教学内容和教学方法进行详细分析和总结的文献。本文将从教案的编写和反思两个方面进行详细阐述。
一、教案编写
教案是教师进行教学活动前的准备工作，对于教学的顺利进行起到了重要的指导作用。编写一份优秀的教案需要教师对课程的理解和掌握，针对学生的实际情况进行针对性的设计。
1. 教学目标的确定
教师首先要明确教学目标，即期望学生通过本课程能够达到的学习效果。目标要具体明确，可以包括知识、能力和情感态度等方面的目标。
2. 教学内容的选择
根据教学目标，教师需要选择恰当的教学内容。英语教学内容多样化，包括听、说、读、写等方面。教师需要根据学生的实际水平和学习需求，确定适宜的教学内容。
3. 教学过程的设计
教学过程设计是教案的关键部分。教师需要充分考虑学生的特点，以及他们在不同阶段的学习需求。合理的教学过程安排可以促使学生的积极参与，提高学习效果。
4. 教学方法的选择
教学方法是教师促使学生达到教学目标的重要手段。教师可以采取多种教学方法，如直观教学法、情境教学法、小组合作学习等，培养学生的学习兴趣和学习能力。
5. 教具和教材的利用
教具和教材是教师课堂教学的重要辅助工具。教师要善于选用教具和教材，帮助学生更好地理解和掌握知识。
二、教案反思
教案反思是教师对于教学活动进行自我评价和总结的过程，旨在提高教学效果和教师的教学水平。
1. 教学目标的合理性分析
教师可以对教学目标进行分析和评价，看是否能够真正达到预期的效果。如果发现目标设定不合理，可以进行相应的调整和改进。
2. 教学内容的适应性检验
教学内容是否适应学生的学习需求和水平是教师反思的一项重要内容。通过自我评价，教师可以发现不足之处，进一步完善和改进教学内容。
3. 教学过程的效果评估
教学过程是否有效、学生是否能够充分参与等是教师需要关注的问题。通过教学反思，教师可以找出问题所在，采取相应的措施提高教学过程的效果。
4. 教学方法的评估和调整
教学反思可以让教师对自己使用的教学方法进行评估和调整。教学方法是否能够达到预期的效果、是否需要改进等都需要教师进行综合考虑。
5. 教具和教材的评价和选择
教具和教材的选择是否合理、是否能够帮助学生更好地理解和掌握知识，是教师反思的一个重要方面。教师可以根据学生的实际情况，进行适当的选择和调整。
结语：
《新目标八年级上册英语教案及反思》是一本对于教学内容和教学方法进行详细分析和总结的文献，它对于提高教师的教学水平和指导学生的学习具有重要意义。教师应该根据教案编写和反思的要求，不断提高自己的教育教学能力，为学生的学习和发展提供更好的支持和帮助。
八年级新目标英语教案 篇15
学习目标：
1词汇：countryside, sky, clear, beauty, nature
翻译短语句型：
1、 思考 _____________ 2、 在乡下________________
3、空气更清新_______________ 4、天更蓝，树更绿___________
5、享受自然的美丽________________ 6、去那儿度假__________
1. What are you thinking about?..你在想什么？
think about考虑，思考与think of 意思相近.如：我正在考虑买一本新词典。
I’m thinking about buying a new dictionary.
think of 作“想起，想到，认为”讲时，与think about 不同
1) Does Wang Wei like the life in the countryside?
_______________________________________
2)How does he think about the life in the countryside?
____________________________________________
1.I’m thinking about life ________________________.（在乡村）
2.The air in the country is_________________________.（很新鲜）
3.I’m going to my grandma’s home for my ________________.（暑假）
4.That __________________（肯定是）fun.
5. Our country is_____ beautiful than before.
A. much many B. more much C .much more D. much
6.Birds are _______than insects.
A. big B. bigger C .biger D. more big
7.Hainan is a very large island. It’s the second _____ island in China.
A. larger B. largest C . large D. most large
8.The box is very______.
A. heavy B. heavier C .heaviest D. more heavy
9.Our garden isn’t so____ as theirs.
A. larger B. largest C .large D.more larger
新目标八年级教案
在教学过程中，老师教学的首要任务是备好教案课件，撰写教案课件是每位老师都要做的事。 教案和课件是高效教学的必要条件，写教案课件要具备哪些步骤？重点推荐“新目标八年级教案”相关的顶尖文章不容错过，在阅读本文以后，相信您会有所收获！
新目标八年级教案 篇1
八年级上Unit 1 How often do you exercise?
◆ 教材分析：
下面我要说的内容是人教版八年级上Unit 1 Section B(3a--4) Page 5，本单元以“How often do you exercise ?”为话题展开教学活动。首先让学生学会恰当地使用频率副词及短语(always, usually, often, sometimes, hardly ever, never) 再学会描述自己或他人的生活方式。通过复习已学习过的动词及短语(shop, exercise, read, go to the movies, watch TV, ,eat vegetables/fruit/junk food, ect)，使学生积极参与，主动合作，让学生在完成任务的过程中，使用英语获取信息，用英语进行交流，从而培养学生运用英语的能力。本单元的Section A部分，已初步认识和使用了频率副词，为进一步使用频率副词及动词短语做语言知识上的准备。本课时主要在此基础上培养学生对语言知识点的综合运用能力，让学生学会阅读、学会写作，学会调查，让学生在体验中内化语言知识，从而培养学生对频率副词以及 how often句型的使用能力。
(1)掌握以下词汇：
habit, try, lifestyle, grade, better, same, as, different, maybe, although, for,
of course, look after, good-better-best, healthy-healthier-healthiest
(2)掌握并会运用下列重要短语和句型：
look after = take care of the same as try to do sth. get good grades
－How often do you exercise? －I exercise every day.
－How often does she drink milk? －She drinks milk every day.
读：通过学习本课时的短文，能读懂介绍个人生活方式的文章。
说：利用所学知识或提示的信息，能在短时间内复述课文。
写：能用本节所学知识，描述有关自己或熟人生活习惯的短文。
通过本单元的学习，养成健康的饮食习惯，保证充足的睡眠时间，进行合理的运动锻炼，以保持健康的体魄。
◆ 教学重点：
1. 能正确运用频率副词和How often…?句型。
2. 培养学生良好的阅读习惯和运用所学知识进行书面表达的能力。
◆ 教学难点：
能运用频率副词描述自己或别人的生活方式。
◆ 教学方法：
任务型教学法和分层教学法．从学生“学”的角度设计教学活动，使学生的学习活动具有明确的目标，把注重语言本身转变为注重语言习惯，随着“任务”的不断深化，整个语言学习的过程也越来越自动化和自主化；分层教学能激发各个层次的学生获取语言信息知识的欲望，提高他们的自信心，从而培养学生学习英语的浓厚兴趣。
◆教学手段：
运用多媒体辅助教学，能使抽象的语言变得直观形象，为学生运用英语进行交际创设情景，实现师生互动，生生互动多向交流。
1、检查本课时生词的预习情况。
（1）让个别学生朗读生词，教师及时正音。然后领读，齐读。
（2）听写生词。让学生以合作小组为单位互批互改，小组长汇报检查情况。对表现好的提出表扬,如果学生掌握情况不好，教师可以结合读音规则等方法帮助学生识记生词。
（1）利用多媒体出示图片导出已学过的单词和短语。
Healthy food: milk, fruit, vegetables
Unhealthy food: junk food, coffee, cola, chocolate
eat junk food/fruit/vegetables, drink milk/coffee, play sports, how often,
every day, hardly, ever, never, two or three times a week
（2）利用上面的单词和短语通过对话形式复习下列句型。
How often do …..? How often does …..? It’s good / bad for one’s health.
①Make a conversation with the Ss:
T: Excuse me? Do you like…….?
S:
T: How often do you…..?
S:
T: It’s good/bad for your health.
②Then ask them to work in pairs.
(通过“复习导入”的方式复习上节课所学知识，自然过渡到本节课的内容，既为下面的3a﹠4的学习做好了铺垫，也提高了学生的自信心。首先通过师生之间的交流做出示范，适当引导，然后实现生生之间互动交流。)
(通过上一环节的准备与铺垫，将“4部分的调查”提前至此，既增强了学生的自信心，调动了学生学习的积极性，主动性，提高了学生学习英语的兴趣，也为下一步的写作打下基础。)
(1)Fill in the charts(绘制三个表格，分别调查your parents and your best friend)
activity Every day Three or four times a week Hardly ever never
(2)Compare and decide: Who is the healthiest person?
1.速读：让学生阅读下面的问题，然后快速阅读短文并选择正确答案。（训练学生快速阅读、捕捉主干信息的能力。）
What does Katrina talk about in her letter?
A. Her exercise.B. Her eating habits.
C. Her sleep. D. Her lifestyle.
2、细读：让学生再认真阅读短文，完成下面的表格，小组讨论后在课内通过多媒体交流展示，下表自exercise分层次逐步展开。（深入课文内容、扫除障碍、加深记忆）
Conclusion Do you think she has a healthy lifestyle? Why or why not? Is her lifestyle the same as yours or different? What are the differences?
3、朗读：教师首先播放录音，让学生跟读，享受地道的英语，感悟语言。然后学生自由朗读。教师抽查学生朗读情况，及时纠正读音、语调、停顿等。这样可以训练和培养学生欣赏文章的意识和能力。
4、精读：学生再进一步阅读，找出短文中的重点句子、短语，发现疑难点，小组内讨论，学生发言解答，教师适当点拨。学生完成笔记。通过这个环节，扫除短语及语法的应用障碍，为写作做好铺垫。
If necessary, the teacher can explain the followings:
(1) try to do sth eg: She tries to study English better. .
(2) help sb (to) do stheg: Can you help me (to) study English ?
(3) the same as … …eg: Lucy is the same as Lily . They’re twins.
(4) look after= take care of eg. If you’re busy, I can look after/take care of your baby.
1、根据上面表格内提示的信息复述短文，1至2名学生展示。（教师可适当示范或引导）
2、学生独立处理3b，我将3b设计出三种难易不同的形式供层次不同的学生选做。
(1)选用给出的单词或短语完成下面的短文。
hardly, ever, milk, vegetables, fruit, junk food, coffee, don’t like, nine hours,
(2)根据给出的首字母提示写出适当的完整的单词形式，完成下面的短文。
(3)教材中的原型。
3、做针对性练习（同步学习第5页第3、4题）：
Encourage the Ss to write about their own habits according to the following
questions （连词and, but, although, so等的使用会使你的文章更流畅！）
①Are you healthy or unhealthy?
②How often do you exercise?
③How often do you eat vegetables , fruit , or junk food?
④How often do you drink milk or coffee?
⑤How many hours do you sleep every night?
（我设计这几个小问题作为写作铺垫,让他们感觉有话可说，这样可以鼓励学生积极参与进来。）
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
What have we learnt today? Let’s make a summary.
Words: ________________________________________________________
Expressions: ___________________________________________________
How to get a healthy lifestyle? ___________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
1、背诵3a .
2、完成同步练习中的Section B．
3、预习第六页的内容。
教学反思：这是一节读写课，阅读和写作是两项，相对独立，但又是相互依赖、相辅相成的技能。叶圣陶先生曾经说过：“阅读是吸收，写作是倾吐，倾吐能否合乎于法度，显然与吸收有密切的联系。” 根据认知心理学观点，一方面，语言应用能力（写作）的提高是建立在大量的语言输入，尤其是大量的阅读基础上；另一方面，语言知识的输出能有效促进语言知识的内化。所以首先要抓好3a 的阅读训练，通过设计任务，采用多种读法，排除学生写作的心理压力和障碍。
对于采访调查环节，我把它放在学生写作训练之前，就是先让学生感知、内化所学语言内容，培养口头交际的能力，也为写作搭好铺垫。学生阅读的过程，也就是学生模拟写作的过程。学生能通过对阅读材料的理解，揣摩作者的意图，身体力行地扮演作者角色，悟其理，师其法。通过对阅读材料的模仿来提高写作技能。通过阅读，有助于学生加深对已学单词的理解和记忆，使这些词汇在反复的接触和运用中得以巩固,为写作储备丰富的语言知识，获得大量的阅读和运用知识的机会，在此基础上进行写作，写作过程便呈现简单化，而且也富有创造性。
新目标八年级教案 篇2
八年级新教材 Unit 2 教案-八年级英语教案-英语教案,试题,论文,听力
The first period: The road to modern English (Reading)
本单元以“世界英语”为中心话题，旨在通过本单元的学习让学生粗略了
解世界英语的发展状况，认识各种各样具有民族、地域特色的英语以及它
们的出现原因和不同之处。同时让学生能够区分、转述带“命令”或“请
求”语气的祈使句，并让学生能用所学构思方法写一篇关于学习经验的作
文。本节课为阅读课，包括Warming-up, Pre-reading, Reading和Comprehending
四个部分。Warming up介绍世界英语，要求学生区分英美语单词。此部分的
目的'是丰富学生有关世界英语的知识，激发学生对英语发展历史的兴趣。
Pre－reading 部分设置了两个与主题有关世界英语的问题。在激活学生已有的
知识的同时引导学生为下一步阅读做好准备。Reading部分简单地说明英语语
言的起源、发展变化、行成原因，以及它的发展趋势。Comprehending 部分旨
在检测学生对课文基本内容的理解程度。具体操作时根据学生的实际情况对
include, play a role, because of, international, native, come up, culture, actually, present,
vocabulary, usage, identity, such as, rapidly
World Englishes come from those countries…(P9)
Native English speakers can understand each other…(P9)
It became less like German, and more like French…(P10)
Enable the students to describe the history of English and know of the differences between
American English and Britain English.
Help the students learn how to analyze the way author describe the history of English.
Divide the text into two parts and find the main idea of each paragraph.
Work together with the partners and express one’s opinion on why people all over the world want to
learn English.
Discussion, reading, listening, cooperative learning, asking-and-answering.
A computer, a recorder and a screen.
Arouse the students’ interest and let the students know of world English.
1. How many languages can you speak?
Standard Chinese, Cantonese, English, Japanese…
2. Which language is used most widely? English
And which language has the largest number of speaker? Chinese
3. English is spoken in many countries, can you list some?
Britain, American, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, India …
4. Why English is spoken in other countries, like American, India…?
1). Englishmen once ruled American, India…
2). Many people moved to America.
……
5. Do you think the kinds of English spoken in these countries are the same?
6. Guess which of the following words are British English and which are American English.
mum/mom in a term/on a term rubber/eraser
British English: mum, in a term, rubber, petrol, center.
7. Do you think old English and modern English are the same?
Listen to an English song ---- Auld Lang Syne,pay attention to the
lyrics (歌词)in red. And what conclusion can you get from this song?
Should auld (old) acquaintance be forgotten.
and never brought to mind?
Should auld (old)acquaintance be forgot
and days of auld lang syne (为了过去的好时光?)
For auld lang syne my dear, for auld lang syne
We’ll take a cup of kindness yet for auld lang syne.
And here’s a hand my trusty friend
and gie’s a hand of thine.(give us a hand of yours)
We’ll take a cup of kindness yet for auld lang syne.
Get the students to know the history of English and help the students to form a good habit of reading.
Get the students to know the history of English and help the student to form a good habit of reading.
A. Fast-readingRead the text quickly and answer two questions:
1. How did different kinds of English come about?
All languages change when cultures communicated with one another.
2. When was India ruled by Britain?
Read the text again carefully and finish three tasks:
1. Do Ex.1 of Comprehending on page 10.
Keys: 1.A 2.D 3.C 4.D 5.B
2. How do you understand the title? (The history and development of English)
3. How many parts can the text be divided into?
and find the main idea of each paragraph. (You can discuss in groups.)
新目标八年级教案 篇3
新目标英语八年级上Unit5 Section A 教学设计
上传: 郑家梅
更新时间：2017-6-7 10:10:29
新目标英语八年级上unit5 section a 教学设计
一.教学目标:(知识目标、能力目标、德育目标)(1)知识目标:通过本单元的学习让学生掌握有关邀请和请求许可的用语,拒绝邀请及合理的解释,在互动的交流中学会谈论自己的计划安排.并学会制作邀请函.(2)能力目标:通过在真实情境中的对话操练,听力练习,游戏以及制作邀请函,培养学生动脑,动口和动手的能力.和语言在真实情境中运用的能力.(3)德育目标:在交际,操练和动手操作的合作学习过程中,培养同学们的合作意识,增进同学间的友谊,并培养学生礼貌的接受和合理的拒绝别人请求的意识.教学重点及难点: 重点:本课的重点词汇短语:study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson ,help my parents, visit my aunt.以及时间短语on Saturday afternoon等.以can开头的一般疑问句,can和can't的区分,和sure, I'd love to.sorry, can't, thank you for asking, maybe another time, i have to…等答句.难点:目标词汇和句型在实际情况中的运用.三.教学方法: 任务型教学法为主体,以小组活动,两人协作,为依托.以游戏,听力,动手练习和笔头练习为载体开展教学.四.学具准备: 教学课件,电脑,学生自制的邀请函所需要用的卡片.五.教学程序: 1.热身(warm-up)在课间就开始播放英文故事视频短片,和中学生英文演讲比赛的片断,吸引学生的注意力,培养学生的预感,增强学习英语的兴趣.课前duty:把全班按座位分成三组,每组确定任务,给出中心话题,group 1 take a vacation ,group 2 keep healthy, group 3get to school.让学生以两人一问一答的对话形式,复习前几单元的知识,只要与所给话题相关的问答都可以.(3)课前展标:展示本课的学习目标.2.新课导入(lead-in)猜词游戏:以一个小的猜词游戏导入新课, 用变化字体错综排列的三个字母,c a n让学生从猜 字母入手,然后启发他们猜猜可以组成什么单词,学生可以猜到是can,这也是本课的要训练的重要词汇情态动词.然后复习can引导的一般疑问句,如“can you sing a song? Can you swim? can you play basketball?”等,继而引出“can you come to my party?”这一本课的题目.这个导入环节是从猜词游戏入手激发学生的兴趣,吸引学生的目光和注意力,并自然的引出本课主题,还可以对相关的知识进行复习.3.新授课过程
(1)新授 短语:本课新授短语有study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson, help my parents, visit my aunt.t: this Sunday is my birthday, i will have a party, can you come to my party?问全体同学 s: sure/yes/ok.T: thank you, and i also invited my friends to my party, but they have a lot of things to do.用师生间的对话引出本课短语,这时候展示图片,练习短语,并用unit3学过的话题“what's he/she doing for weekend?”来提问,这样即可以复习旧的句型,也可以练习新的短语.看图识图以后,让学生one by one的形式看图说短语,或说句子,以达到熟练掌握,人人都会的程度.(2)填图练习:完成书上的section a 1a用这个填图练习来巩固刚学过的短语.(3)小组合作:就刚才练习短语的图片询问 can you come to my party?启发学生答出sure, i'd love to.和i'm sorry, I can't.i have to go to the doctor.以及sorry, I can't.I'm helping my parents.等.在大屏幕中出示这些句子,让学生有一个视觉上的印象,另外对have to 句型进行强调和反复练习.进一步提问三人称“can he come to my party?”以及三人称的答句.师生之间的简短的示范练习之后,让学生根据大屏幕上的语言提示以小组为单位进行对话练习.运用所学短语,也鼓励学生发挥自己的想 像力,根据自己的实际情况练习一 人称和三人称的邀请和拒绝邀请.(4)听力练习:为了巩固所学句型进行听力练习.完成1b.一遍听内容填图,核实答案,一遍看原文复听,最后让学生两人协作复述或阅读听力原文.(5)游戏时间:大段的听力练习过后学生有了些疲劳的情绪,这个时候要积极调动学生的学习兴趣,刺激学习的兴奋点,所以在这里准备了一个游戏,名字叫“can you guess?”准备一些遮住一部分的图片,然后逐步露出图片,让学生猜: t: i invited some of my friends to my party, but they have some weekend plans, so they can't come to my party, can you guess why? keys: can he come to my party? no, he can't.he has to go to the doctor.etc.这一部分即是一个猜图片的游戏,也是对can引导的一般疑问句和have to的三人称的练习,达到了一箭双雕的目的.(6)导入听力:三段听力练习连续而至,势必会使学生有一些懈怠,此处运用一个小的看图练习导入,并对can和can't进行区分练习.准备两个小图片,笑脸和哭脸,笑脸代表can而哭脸代表can't,给出句子,让学生根据是笑脸或是哭脸说出can或can't的句子.如,jeff come to the party.mary swim in the pool.(7)完成2a 2b让学生从听觉上区分情态东西can和否定形式can't, 并进一步强化拒绝邀请的方式和合理的理由.依然采取让学生复述或阅读原文的形式来核对答案.4.动手练习:(1)准备工作:在大屏幕上展示已做好的邀请函,解释邀请函上要出现的信息,提出问题“what is it about? whose invitation is it? when is the party? where is the party?”启发学生了解邀请函上要具备那些信息.完成3a,并请同学两人协作填出正确答案.(2)做一做:拿出准备好的硬纸板,制作自己的邀请函,此时在大屏幕上给出邀请函的模板,让学生能够明确邀请函要包含的信息内容.(3)展示并演练:用实物投影仪展示制作优秀的邀请函,用这样的方法鼓励和表彰制作的优秀的同学,让大家了解他的作品,并以两人协作的方式就此邀请函内容模仿3a进行对话练习.这部分也是本课的一个拓展和延伸的环节也是本课知识的一个生成,跳出了party 这一话题的局限,启发学生就其他方面的邀请制作和讨论邀请函,如it's a sports meeting, it's a movie, it's an English club , etc.给出keys: can you come to my party on Sunday? When is it? where is it? How can I get there? etc.让学生利用本课所学的知识畅所欲言,作为本课知识学习的成果展示.5.小结: 小结部分,本着“把小结换给学生的理念”,在幻灯片中给出总结提示,让学生们参照总结提示,总结本课所学的知识点,和语法项目要点.给出语言提示“can…? sure,…….Sorry ,I can't I have to…….”启发学生说出本课所学到的短语,句子,或有用的表达方式.6.课堂练习: 为了巩固本课所学的知识,为学生及时补充了一些配套的笔头练习,让学生学会运用,和对自己进行检测.1.“can you go to the movie with us on Sunday?” “of course._ it is”5:00 in the afternoon.“ a.where b.what time c.how soon d.when 2.”would you like to join us in basketball?“ ____but I'm afraid I have to study for my science test.” a.I wouldn't b.Id love to c..I don't like it 3.thanks___ your help, and now i have made great progress in my English.a.to b.with c.for d.by 4.the poor lady had to go out for food ____a cold morning.a.in b.at c.on d.
新目标八年级教案 篇4
一．说教材
1．教材的地位与作用：Unit10 I’m going to be a basketball player.这单元通过复习和学习一些关于职业的词汇，用be going to谈论长大以后打算做什么以及打算怎样实现目标，与七年级（下）Unit 4 I want to be an actor.学习关于职业的词汇以及用want to bedo谈论将来，和八年级(上)Unit 3 What are you doing for vacation?用be doing谈论将来的打算有着密切的联系。本课是这单元的第一课和重点课，学好本课将为进一步学习一般将来时打下良好的基础。
2．教学目标：
(1).知识目标:掌握本课重点词汇computer programmer, computer science, engineer, pilot, professional ….本课主要句型：What are you going to be when you grow up? I’m going to be an engineer. How are you going to do that? I’m going to study math hard.
语法：用be going to表示一般将来时。
(2).能力目标：培养学生应用英语谈论将来计划，提高学生听、说、读、写等能力。
(3).情感目标：通过谈论将来打算做什么以及准备怎样实现目标，让学生考虑自己的将来，及早为将来做好准备。培养学生学习英语的强烈兴趣，乐于参加各种活动的积极情感，善于合作，培养学生团结协作精神。
(4).教学重、难点：重点是掌握本课computer programmer, computer science, engineer, pilot, professional等重点词汇，What are you going to be when you grow up? I’m going to be an engineer. How are you going to do that? I’m going to study math hard.等重点句型和语法：用be going to表示一般将来时。
难点是一般将来时be going to中be的具体形式和后面接动词原形的用法,而学生根据自己喜欢的职业，运用所学知识谈论自己打算怎样做来实现目标则既是难点，又是能力训练点。
确立教学目标的依据：根据英语课程标准规定，通过听、说、读、写的训练，使学生
获得英语基础知识和为交际初步运用英语的能力，激发学生的学习兴趣，为进一步学习
打好初步的基础。此外，根据我国国情和外语教学大纲的要求，现阶段外语教学的素质
教育主要包括思想素质教育、目的语素质教育、潜在外语能力的培养、非智力因素的培
养等四方面。
二.说教法
1．“Teach English in English”:即新课标倡导的“用英语教英语”，尽量用英语教学，创造英语课堂良好的听的环境，让学生充分感知，积极体验，大胆实践，把握用英语交际的机会，鼓励学生大胆开口说英语。
2．突出重点，突破难点：通过听力训练、做调查、小组竞赛等多种形式反复操练重点句型，巩固所学知识，提高灵活运用能力，通过操练中人称的变化和幻灯片展示帮助学生更好地领会语法。
3．任务型教学法：倡导体验参与，培养自主学习能力。课前布置任务，要求学生复习七年级（下）Unit 4中关于职业的词汇，预先读本课新词，让学生带着任务有目的地上课，并在课堂学习中不断获得完成此任务所必须的知识、能力、技能等，为最终完成任务作全面的准备。
4.游戏教学法：新课标倡导的“玩中学，学中玩”的理念很受学生欢迎。设计猜谜游戏复习七年级（下）Unit 4中学到的关于职业的词汇，既达到以旧带新的目的，又有效地激发了学生的学习兴趣，活跃了课堂气氛。
5.竞赛教学法：根据初中生争强好胜的性格特征，在课堂内引进小组竞争机制，提高团体活动效率，加强团体凝聚力，激发学生的求知欲和参与意识。
7．教具：电脑多媒体、谜语卡片、录音机等。
三．说学法
1.学会预习：发挥学生的主观能动性，变被动学习为主动学习，带着问题有目的地听课，可以更好地把握课堂的`重点和难点，提高课堂效率。
2．在游戏中学习：在“玩中学，学中玩”，好玩是学生的天性，让学生轻松学习，体会学英语原来可以这么有趣，提高学习兴趣与热情。
3．合作学习：积极参与2人或4人小组对话或活动，相互交流，互帮互助，合作完成任务，培养团队精神，更好地掌握本课所学知识。
4．“为用而学，用中学，学了就用”：善于抓住用英语交际的机会，充分感知，联系实际，积极体验，大胆实践。
四．说学生：
1．大班教学，学生语言实践机会少，程度不一，整体教学中较难兼顾到具体对象，容易两极分化，通过各种合作学习的活动，可以照顾学习英语有困难的学生，尽可能多地为他们创造语言实践的机会，促使学生互相学习，互相帮助，体验集体荣誉感和成就感，发展合作精神。
2．农村学生学英语起步晚，底子薄，脸皮薄，怕犯错，不敢开口，“哑巴英语”的现象比较严重，在教学中关注学生的情感，努力营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围，尊重每个学生，积极鼓励他们大胆尝试，保护他们的自尊心和积极性。
3．中学生活泼、好动、好胜心强、可塑性大，在教学过程中，注意设置情境，倡导其活动参与，并引进小组竞争机制，更好地激发学生的学习兴趣，提高课堂效率。
五．说教学过程：根据英语五步教学法“组织课堂、复习、导入新课、讲授新知识、操练巩固”来开展教学，通过小组竞猜复习学过的关于职业的词汇，多媒体展示图片学习关于职业的新单词，通过联系实际介绍自己的个人成长计划，导入新用法What are you going to be when you grow up?进一步谈论How are you going to do that?引导学生用be going to谈论将来的计划，并通过听力训练、做调查、小组竞赛等形式进行操练，使学生更快更好地识记，巩固所学知识，提高灵活运用能力。
学生活动调查表：
Unit 10 I am going to be a basketball player.
Name What is he/she going to do when he/she grows up? How is he/she going to do that?
Unit10 Section A Period1(Go for it 2A)教案
1.课题：I’m going to be a basketball player.
2.主题:人生目标。
3.功能:谈论将来计划。
4.教学目标：
(1).知识目标:掌握本课重点词汇computer programmer, computer science, engineer, pilot, professional ….本课主要句型：What are you going to be when you grow up? I’m going to be an engineer. How are you going to do that? I’m going to study math hard.
语法：用be going to表示一般将来时。
(2).能力目标：培养学生应用英语谈论将来计划，提高学生听、说、读、写等能力。
(3).情感目标：通过谈论将来打算做什么以及准备怎样实现目标，让学生考虑自己的将来，及早为将来做好准备。培养学生学习英语的强烈兴趣，乐于参加各种活动的积极情感，善于合作，培养学生团结协作精神。
(4).教学重、难点：重点是掌握本课computer programmer, computer science, engineer, pilot, professional等重点词汇以及What are you going to be when you grow up? I’m going to be an engineer. How are you going to do that? I’m going to study math hard.等重点句型和语法：用be going to表示一般将来时。
难点是一般将来时be going to中be的具体形式和后面接动词原形的用法,而学生根据自己喜欢的职业，运用所学知识谈论自己打算怎样做实现目标则既是难点，又是能力训练点。
5.教具：电脑多媒体、谜语卡片、录音机等。
6．教学过程：
Step1 Organization and duty report
Step2 Revision
1. Revise the words about jobs by playing a guessing game.
2. Ask students to say jobs we’ve learned.
通过猜谜的形式复习旧单词,调动学生的学习积极性。
Step3 Presentation
1. Teach new words and expressions by showing the pictures.
利用多媒体展示图片引入新词汇，直观、形象，印象深刻。
2. Present What are you going to be when you grow up? How are you going to do that?
3. Ask What’s heshe going to be when heshe grows up? How’s heshe going to do that?
结合实际谈论自己的个人成长计划，引导学生谈论自己的将来计划。
Step4 Listening
Listen and match the items in 1b,then listen and repeat.
通过听、说、读，进一步巩固所学知识。
Step5 Practice
Ask the students to make an investigation about their future plans in groups of four.
通过小组调查活动操练本课重点句型。
Step6 Sum up
In this class we learn to use “be going to” to describe future plans.
通过小结，回顾本课主要内容
Step7 Homework
Read the four conversations in 1b, recite one of them.
Make their own conversation in pairs, write it on the exercise books.
布置两人合作做对话，促使学生加强合作，互相帮助。
新目标八年级教案 篇5
培养学生优良的英语学习兴趣、习惯，帮助学生树立自信心，养成良好的英语学习习惯，提高、发展自主学习的能力，形成有效的学习策略;使学生掌握一定的语言基本知识和技能，有较好的语感，获得初步运用英语的能力，为实际应运打下扎实的基础。同时注重综合能力的开发、提高，培养他们的观察、思维、记忆、想象和创造等方面的能力;让学生了解中西方文化的差异，培养爱国主义精神，增强世界观意识，并结合课外学习，达到教学的最优秀性，培养学生良好的自学能力和习惯，并做到持之以恒，使本年段的英语教学能进一步发展、提高。
在这一学期中，主要培养学生学习英语的兴趣，继续培养学习英语的学习习惯，要很好地完成本学期的教学学习任务，重视阅读能力的培养，在实际教育工作中把做好学生思想工作放在学科教育的首位，通过师生的共同努力，为学科和学生本人再创佳绩。
八年级英语是人民教育出版社社出版的'新目标英语，教材编排有以下目的：
1.要使学生受到听、说、读、写、英语的训练，掌握最基础的语言知识和语言技能以及培养初步援用英语交际的能力;养成良好的外语学习习惯，掌握学习外语的基本方法;为进一步学习和运用英语打下扎实的基础。
2.使学生明确学习英语的目的性，
3.培养初步运用英语交际的能力和自学能力。
三、教材重点、难点
1、语音教学 本册课本在上册的基础上进一步学习和运用音标和单词的发音规则，着重抓好学生的预习，自学能力。
2、词汇教学 本册课本所要学习、掌握的单词约400个，另有固定搭配和习惯用语若干条，任务较重。
新目标八年级教案 篇6
Unit 9 When was he born 第一课时 l教学内容与分析 教学内容： Section A: 1a 1b 1c SectionB: 1a 1b 3c 教学目标： a. 能够掌握基本单词和词汇。 b. 能够运用基本句型进行提问。 c. 能够运用所学形容词来描述他们所崇拜敬佩的人。。 l教学重点、难点分析： 教学重点：基本单词，词汇和句型。。 教学难点：能够运用wh-句型用一般过去式提问。。 l 课前准备 本课时的教学课件 教师准备磁带和录音机。 l 教学设计 教学步骤 建议和说明 K热身/复习（Warm-up/Revision） An English song: Twelve months Greetings K呈现/操练（Presentation/Practice） 教学句型 When were you born? I was born in/on … When was he/she born? He/She was born in/on… T: Student A, How old are you? A: I’m thirteen. T: When is you birthday? A: My birthday is August 16th. T: You were born in 1993. You were born on August 16th,1993. T: Student B, How old are you? B: I’m … T: When is your birthday? B: My birthday is … T: You were born in …/on…. T: Student C, when were you born? T and C: I was born….. T: Student D, what about you? D: I was born …. 教学in 和on 接时间的区别 in接年或月份或年月 on接具体的年月日 学生接龙操练一组 A： When were you born? B: I was born in /on… When were you born? C: I was born in/on … When were you born? D: I was born in/on… ….. 学生pairwork和performance 并引入 When was he /she born ? He/She was born in/on…. 教师呈现一张刘翔的照片。并就他问一些问题。 Who is that? What does he do? What does he look like? How old is he? When is his birthday? When was he born? ‘教师再引入二个体育明星：姚明和罗纳尔多 ’.Work on 1a 写出自己所知道的体育明星. K听力训练 work on 1b 听出四位明星的'出生日期. K拓展/巩固（Extension/Consolidation） pairwork as 1c vperformance wTake Jordan for example and present these sentences and some adjectives, like famous, outstanding and so on: T: When did he start to play basketball? How long did he play basketball? When did he stop playing basketball? What is he like? Talk about other famous persons just as above: work on Section B 1a and 1b Exercise Homework (work on 3c on Page 57.) Write a short passage about your favourite person. 在学唱中调动学生情感，营造氛围，并有意识地复习前面学过的十二个月份。 已学知识的巩固，真实的情景使学生容易学会如何表达并容易接受所要学的新知识。 通过接龙这简单易操作的活动强化训练新知识。简易操作的两人合作比赛，大大提高了学生的参与欲望，强化了学生的听力。自然而然的提高了学生的学习效率。 学生熟悉并崇拜的明星出现能够引起他们的好奇心，并激发他们学习的 欲望。 用熟悉的人物引出新句型,学生容易理解并接受. 巩固课堂所学内容. 为下堂课的值日报告作准备。
新目标八年级教案 篇7
Step 1 Learn to read the words on p127
1. Look at the new words and try to read them in pairs.
2. Let one student to read them out .
3. Correct the pronunciation.
Step 2 : Learn to rem ember words on p 103
一. Remember the words by looking at pictures.
二. Remember the words by matching itself with its meaning.
三. Remember the words by th eir similar pronunciations and forms.
1. myself yourself herself himself
1. possible （可能的） impossible（不可能的）
2. bored（无聊的.,修饰人） boring（无聊的，修饰物）
3.interview （动词，采访） interviewer（名词，采访者）
五.Remember the words by their Chinese.
听写单词，老师提学 生默。不会的，再 记忆，默写。
新目标八年级教案 篇8
2，回顾一般过去时的使用，并能用一般过去时交际和写作。
【课前预习】预习Section B，写出下列单词，每个写2遍。
1.活动________________ 2. 决定_________________ 3. 尝试____________________
4. 鸟_________________ 5. 自行车 ________________6. 商人_____________________
7. 想知道_________________8. 差别___________________9. 顶部______________________
10.等候___________________11. 雨伞__________________12. 湿的_____________________
13. 在…下面_________________14. 足够的_________________15. 饥饿的_________________
16. 鸭子_____________ 17. 不喜欢_________________
1. 感受到_______________2. 到达___________________3. 喜欢做某事____________________
4. 乘火车_______________5. 第二天__________________6. …顶部________________________
7. 因为_________________8. 决定做某事_______________9. 过去________________________
10. 走上去___________________11. 太多______________12. 步行________________________
13. 忘记做某事______________________14. 发现_____________15. 上升__________________
16. 过得愉快________________17. 继续做某事_________________18.到处__________________
1.decide 意为：__________, 决定做某事 decide to do sth 决定不做某事 decide ______ _____ do sth
Eg: (1)They decide _________(go) on vacation on Sunday. 他们决定在周日度假。
(2)The girl decided _____ ____ ________to his friends last month.女孩上个月决定不给他的朋友写信。
decide 名词为decision, 决心，决定。 Make a decision to do sth 决心/决定做某事
2. try 意为：___________. try to do sth：努力做某事 try doing sth：尝试着做某事 have a try：试一试
Eg: (1) To keep healthy, I try _______ ______(eat) a lot of vegetables and fruits.
为了保持健康，我努力吃很多的蔬菜和水果。
(2) Why don’t you try _________(ride) a bike to go to school? 你为什么不试图骑自行车去学校呢?
拓展：try one’s best to do sth 尽某人的努力做某事,相当于do one’s best to do sth
Eg: You must _______ ____ _____ ______ ______(pass) the exam.你必须尽努力通过这次考试。
3. building 意为：___________. 是由v._______+_______构成。因此，building既是动词build的动名词，也是名词建筑物。
Eg: (1) Look! The workers ____________ some beautiful houses.看，工人们正在建造一些漂亮的房子。
(2) 这座建造物是多么的漂亮啊!_______ ________ _______ _________ ______!
同类词：write---__________,作品 feel --__________, 感情，感觉
4. wait v&n意为：_________. 观察下列句子，总结规律。
(1) It’s important to wait for him before the meeting. 会议前等他很重要。
(2) He had a long wait for the bus. 他等公交车等了很长时间。
(3) The students should wait in line in the dinning hall. 学生们在餐厅应该排队等候。
(4)—Where is Tom? ---He is waiting at the train station. 汤姆在哪?他正在车站等火车。
(5)The little boy can’t wait to meet his mother. 小男孩迫不及待的见到他的妈妈。
【总结规律】从句1中得知，等待某人或某物 _____________________.句2中wait是_______词。句3中词组排队等待：___________________。句4中，在某地等…________________。句5中，固定词组,迫不及待做某事：___________________________.
I. 用词的正确形式填空。
1. They tried ___________(finish) the work on time. 2. I’ll try _______________ (not read) in bed.
3. I can’t decide what _____________(do). 4. What is he __________(wait) for?
5. This town is famous for its beautiful ________(build). 6 Do you enjoy _______(camp) with your friends?
7. They made me _____ _____ (感觉像)one of the family. 8. There are many _____(商人) on the busy street.
9. We ________ these movies because they are boring. ( like) 11. I decided _______(travel) to Hangzhou.
12. ______________, (第二天)The boy got to school on time.
13. Mark Twin has many famous ___________(write).
14. The boy _______his mother for an hour in the park.(wait) 15. He ______ ______he was a bird.(感觉像)
II. 句型转换。
1. Alice did her homework at home yesterday. (改为否定句)
Alice _________ _______ her homework at home yesterday
2. There are some tea in the cup. (变成一般疑问句) ________ there ______tea in the cup?
3. They went to the beach on vacation.(自己就某一部分划线提问)________________________________?
4. She stayed there for a month.(对画线部分提问) ______ _______ ________she ______ there?
5. Miss Smith writes a l etter to her boyfriend in her bedroom. (用yesterday evening改写)。
Miss Smith _______ ______ ________ to her boyfriend in her bedroom yesterday evening.
III.请根据提示完成下列短文。
Last summer, I went to climb the m________ with my family in Shandong. We usually go traveling by car, but this time we d________ to try_______(go ) there by train. It was an _________(excite) train trip. After 7 hours, we a_________ there in _________(excite). I felt really thirsty. I bought some _________(特殊的) water----spring water. Then we h________ lunch there.
What a __________(different) a day makes!
We wanted to walk up to the t________, but then it________(开始) raining a little so we made a d__________ to take the train. We waited over an hour for the train, because there were__________(太多) people. When we were ____________(在…顶部) of the mountain, it was raining h_________. We couldn’t see things clearly. And my father was hungry, so we bought a bowl of rice. It _______(尝起来) really great. We didn’t have an u__________ so we were wet and cold. It was t__________! Luckily, we took _________(不少) phot os. ____________(每件事)is unforgettable(难以忘记的).
IV. 书面表达。根据表格内容，写一篇日记，介绍你一天的活动情况，可以适当发挥，90词左右。
Unit I Where did you go on vacation? 第四课时
【学习目标】：1，学习Section B 的日记内容，并能熟练运用其知识。
2，学习运用一般过去时写日记。
【课前预习】预习Section B，找出下列词组。
1. 一些特别的事情________________ 2. 为某人买某物 ______________3. 趣味公园______________
4. 到达槟城___________________ 5. 在我们旅馆附近_________________6. 100年前_______________
7. 中国商人的房子_____________________8. 在城镇附近散步________________________________
9. 走到山顶________________10. 一个多小时________________
11. 下小雨(大雨)________________/___________ 12 糟糕的天气_______________________
13. 一个多小时________________ 14. 足够的钱______________15. 一碗鱼肉饭___________________
新目标八年级教案 篇9
八年级英语第十八单元Come to the party-八年级英语教案-英语教案,试题,论文,听力
A.单词 birthday 生日，party聚会，tell告诉，feel感觉，laugh大笑doorbell门铃，sandwich三明治，plate盘子，candle蜡烛
B.词组have a party举行聚会，give…the message把这个信息给……
2.日常用语 1)It does’t matter.没关系。2) see you!=Good bye!再见！3) Thank you for asking me to …。谢谢你邀请我……。4) May I speak to …,please ?我找×××接电话。5)Here’s your present。这是给你的礼物。6)Happy birthday! 生日快乐。7)There is no time to …。没有时间做某事。
在本单元我们将学习如何“邀请”和“应答”；如何“请求许可”和“应答”。请看例句：
邀请：1) Would you like to …? 2) I hope you can…
应答：1) Thanks a lot for…? 2) I would love to … 3) I’m very sorry, I can’t …
请求许可：1) May/ Could I speak to …, Please ? 2) Can I …?
应答：1) Certainly. 2) I’m afraid not. 3) sure. 4) No, you can’t.
1) 单独使用，可作肯定回答，相当于Certainly或Yes。例如：
①－Would you like to come ??/FONT>Sure。你愿意来吗？当然愿意。
2)祈使句Be sure +动词不定式，可用于表示向对方提出强烈的要求，意为“务必”、“切望”。例如：
②Be sure to return it next week. 请务必下星期归还。
③Be sure to come again to Beijing.一定要再来北京。
3)be sure +动词不定式，表示说话人的一种推测或判断，可译为“一定”、“肯定”。例如：
④It’s sure to snow this afternoon.今天下午一定会下雪。
⑤The old woman is sure to live to ninety.那个老人肯定能活到九十岁。
4)be sure +of /about.表示主语，即人“相信”或“对……有把握”。例如：
⑥Mr Green is sure of his business.格林先生对自己的工作很有把握。
⑦I am sure of getting to the top.我自信能达到顶峰。
5)be sure +从句，表示“肯定”、“有把握”。例如：
⑧I am sure that my sister can skate well.我肯定我妹妹滑冰特棒。
⑨Are you sure he is living in Xi’an ?你肯定他就住在西安吗？
注：如果说“她一定会留下来”，英语有以下几种表达法。例如：
⑩She’s sure to stay here./I’m sure of her staying here./I’m sure that she will stay here./Surely she will stay here.
1)That’s right.“对”，“很对”。例如：
①－Classes begin at 7:40, don’t they ? －Yes, that’s right.?－7:40开始上课，是吗？－对．
2)All right.“行”、“好（吧）”、“（病）好了”。例如：
②－Shall we go out for a walk ?－All right ．我们散步去好吗？－行。好。
3)That’s all right.“没关系”、“不用谢”。是向对方致谢或道歉时的`礼貌用语。例如：
③－I’m sorry I have broken your pen.－That’s all right.
－对不起，我弄坏了你的钢笔．－没关系。
④－Thank you very much.－That’s all right.别客气。
1)be afraid +动词不定式，表示不敢做某事。 2)be afraid of +动词?－ing，表示害怕出现某种结果。例如：
①I am afraid to get up late because I’m afraid of getting there late.
我不敢晚起床，因为我怕迟到。
2)I’m afraid +从句，往往相当于I’m sorry, but …，表示带有歉意的回绝，表示带有一种担忧。例如：
②I’m afraid I can’t go with you.=I’m sorry, but I can’t go with you.
抱歉，我恐怕不能和你一起去。
3)I’m afraid so与I’m afraid not常用作答语，前者表示肯定，后者表示否定。so和not相当于that从句。例如：
③－It is going to rain.?－Yes, I’m afraid so./Yes. I’m afraid that it is going to rain.－是的，恐怕是要下雨了。
④－Shall we play foot ball here ?－I’m afraid not. /I’m afraid that you mustn’t play football here.我们在这儿踢球行吗？－恐怕不行。
注：I’m afraid与I hope互为反义。例如：
⑤I’m afraid she won’t go there tomorrow.我担心/怕她明天不去那儿。
⑥I hope she won’t go there. 我希望她明天不去那儿。
so是替代词，通常意义为“也如此”。
1)so +助动词/情态动词/连系运动+另一主语，表示另一主语与前面某人的动作或状态有着相同的肯定概念。例如：
①I am a student and so is she.我是个学生，她也是。
②They had a good time last night, so did I.昨晚他们玩得很愉快，我也是。
③He can swim and so can I.他会游泳，我也会。
2)so+人称代词（同一主语）+助动词/情态动词/连系动词，用以重述前文，以表示强调或赞同。例如：
④－This story is very interesting.－So it is.－这个故事很普通．－的确如此。
⑤－They study very hard. ?－So they do .－他们学习十分努力．－的确如此。
5. It’s a pleasure. 与with pleasure的区别。
△It’s a Pleasure./ A pleasure与You are welcome.等习语意义相同，用于当别人对你说Thank you. 时，即“不用谢”。例如：
－Thank you for coming to see me . －It’s a pleasure.－谢谢你来看我．－不用谢。
△With pleasure与All right, No problem. I’d like to等习语意义相同。用于别人求你做某事，你很乐意去做的时候。例如：
－Could you post the letter for me ? －With pleasure.
－你能否替我把这封信寄走？－愿意效劳。
注：简而言之，It’s a pleasure用于事情发生之后，而with pleasure用于事情发生之前。
1)( )A. happy B. fly C. July D. dry
2)( )A. English B. shine C. thank D. thing
3)( )A. reach B. child C. teacher D. school
4)( )A. above B. love C. strong D. son
5)( )A. count B. country C. young D. enough
6)( )A. weather B. heavy C. great D. ready
7)( )A. tooth B. foot C. book D. good
8)( )A. similar B. south C. sure D. bus
9)( )A. birthday B. yesterday C. today D. says
10)( )A. park B. warm C. party D. part
1)－Your father isn’t a worker, is he ? － .
A. No, he is .
2)－Thank you for teaching us so well, Miss Gao. － .
D. That’s all right.
3)－Where are you, lucy ?－I’m in the bedroom, and .
4) a great party ! delicious the cake is !
5)I get up very late this morning. There no time have breakfast.
6)－May I use the bike, please ?－ , it’s not mine.
7)－Lovely weather!－ .
B. Yes, isn’t it ?
D. No, it is sunny.
8)－Hello, may I speak to Jim, please ?－ .
B. I am here.
9)－I’m sorry I’ve broken your pen. － .
10)－Could you take a message for me, please ?－ .
We drink tea every day. But more than three hundred years ago, most people in Europe did not know anything about tea. Some people had heard about it, but very few of them knew what to do about it.
There’s a story about an English sailor(海员) who went do countries in the east, the west and the south. He had been to India and China. One day he came home and brought some tea as a present for his mother. She told her friends about the present and asked them to a “tea-party”. When her friends came to the “tea-party”, the old woman brought out some tea leaves and asked them to eat. Of course, nobody liked the tea-leaves. At that time, the sailor came in. he looked at the table and said, “Mother, what have you done with the tea ?” “I boiled(煮)it as you said.”. “and what did you do with the water ?”“I threw it away, of course.” answerd the old woman. Now ,“you may throw away the leaves, too. ”Said the sailor.
1.The sailor gave his mother some as a present.
2.The old woman asked her friends to a .
3.The guests ate at the tea-party.
4.Everyone the tea-leaves.
5.The old woman kept the leaves but threw the away.
Every week Peter and Linda 1 from their parents. This money is their weekly pocket money. 2 is not a gift(礼物), Peter and Linda must work 3 the family then they can get the money. Peter 4 out the garbage(车库) and cleans the places around 5 .He should do it every day, 6 sometimes he forgets. Linda helps her mother 7 the cooking. She also washes the dishes(盘子)after meals. Peter and Linda 8 use their money for food. They use it for something they 9 . Sometimes they get to a park. Sometimes they buy books. They keep their money to buy something 10 .
八年级英语第十八单元Come to the party_八年级英语教案-英语教案,试题,论文,听力
新目标八年级教案 篇10
新目标英语八年级上册unit7课件
Teaching and learning steps
Step 1 Learn to read the words on p127
1. Look at the new words and try to read them in pairs.
2. Let one student to read them out .
3. Correct the pronunciation.
Step 2 : Learn to rem ember words on p 103
一. Remember the words by looking at pictures.
1. robot
2. tree
3. rocket
4. astronaut
5. space station
6.moon
7. pet
8. parrot
9. the Word Cup
10. scientist
11.factory
12.earthquake
13.snake
14.toothbrush
二. Remember the words by matching itself with its meaning.
1. probably：maybe
2. unpleasant: not happy
3. housework: chores
三. Remember the words by th eir similar pronunciations and forms.
1. myself yourself herself himself
2. few fewer
3. look book took
4. which such
5. man human
6.bought thought
7. sound found
8. see seem
四. Remember the words
1. possible （可能的） impossible（不可能的）
2. bored（无聊的.,修饰人） boring（无聊的，修饰物）
3.interview （动词，采访） interviewer（名词，采访者）
五.Remember the words by their Chinese.
Step 3 Consolidation of words
听写单词，老师提学 生默。不会的，再 记忆，默写。
新目标八年级教案 篇11
人教版八年级英语教案上册Unit 5 教学设计
为学生设置情境，帮助学生在不同情况下做出正确的选择和回答，使学生在应用中掌握知识。
1. 掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Canyou come to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation
礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。
礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation
根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。
1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：
教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。
2.完成任务，合作学习：
教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握所学的知识。
任务一：Planning abirthday party.
让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。
任务二：Writing aninvitation card.
学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。
学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。
完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：
We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?
When is it going tostart?
I’m sorry. I haveto....
3. 拓展学习：
学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的.特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。
可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。
①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。
③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。
have a rest play there bebe busy practice be free listen to
1. Can they __________the music in the classroom?
2. I’m sorry. TomorrowI’m __________ soccer and having a math lesson.
3. He has got a badheadache. Let him______________.
4.__________ a lot ofinteresting books in the library.
5. We’ll have a pianolesson on Friday. The teacher asked us ________ the piano everyday.
6. Paul and Eliza___________ both ________ on Sunday. They can watch the footballmatch.
7. I’m sorry,I___________ really ___________ this week. I can’t go to seeyou.
( ) 1. Would you like acold drink?
( ) 2. Would you like togo to the cinema on Friday?
( ) 3. Would you like ahamburger?
( ) 4. Would you likethat cassette for your birthday?
( ) 5. Would you likehelp with your homework?
a. No thanks, I don’tlike that kind of music.
b. No thanks, I don’t eatmeat.
c. Yes please, I feelvery thirsty.
d. Yes please, I can’tunderstand it at all.
e. No thanks, I don’tlike cinemas.
1. 应为listento根据题中music，引出词组listen to the music
2. 应为playing，与句尾having amath lesson 呼应。
3. 应为have a rest，注意词组letsb. do sth.
4. 应为There are，因为后面的a lotof interesting books是复数。
5. 应为to practice，注意词组asksb. to do sth.
6.应为are…free，注意句意“他们能看足球比赛”。
7.应为am…busy，注意句意“我不能去看你”。
新目标九年级英语课件9篇
编辑为您提供了“新目标九年级英语课件”的相关资讯供您参考，希望您能从本文中获得一些宝贵的经验和教训。老师在开学前需要把教案课件准备好，现在着手准备教案课件也不迟。教案是课堂教学的框架。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇1】
凄美
昨晚我的一个中国朋友带我去听了一场中国民间音乐会。其中有一首二胡曲尤其打动了我。音乐出奇的美，但是在那美的背后，我感受到了悲伤和痛苦。这首曲子有一个简单的名字——《二泉映月》，但它是我听到过最感人的曲子之一。二胡的声音听起来如此悲伤，以至于我听的时候也几乎为之落泪。后来我查阅了《二泉映月》的历史，然后我开始理解音乐中蕴含的伤感。
这首曲子是由一位叫阿炳的民间音乐家写成的，他于1893年出生在无锡市。在他还很小的时候，他的母亲就去世了。阿炳的父亲教他弹奏各种乐器，如鼓、笛子和二胡。到了17岁，阿炳就以他的音乐天赋而闻名。然而，他的父亲去世后，阿炳的生活变得更加糟糕。他很贫穷，还得了很严重的疾病，并因此失明。好些年他都没有回家，他住在大街上，以演奏音乐来谋生。即使在结了婚，成了家以后，他还是继续在城市的街道上唱歌、演奏。他以这种方式表演了很多年。
阿炳惊人的音乐技能让他在有生之年得以非常出名。到他临终前，他已经可以演奏600多首曲子了，这些大部分都是他自己写的。遗憾的是，只有六首曲子被流传下来得以传世。但时至今日，他的作品依旧受人们喜爱。如今，阿炳的《二泉映月》成了所有伟大的二胡演奏家弹奏和鉴赏的曲子。它已成了中华文化瑰宝之一。它的凄美不仅在于描绘出阿炳自己的生活，同时也唤起人们痛苦经历中那抹挥之不去的忧伤。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇2】
restaurant饭店 bank银行 another另一个 Queen皇后
market市场 dormitory宿舍 playground运动场 lucky幸运的
in the middle of在---的中间 police station警察局 next to在---的旁边
sports stadium运动场 in front of在---的前面 in the front row在前排
1) Excuse me. How can I get to the post office?
打扰了。怎样可以到邮局 ？
2) Can you tell me the way to the train station, please?
请问你能告诉我去火车站的路吗？
3) Is there a No.25 bus-stop near here? 这里附近有25路车的车站吗？
4) Walk along this street./ Go straight down this street.
沿着这条街一直走。
5) Go past the department store. 走过百货商店。
6) Turn left into Park Road. Take the second road on the right.
向左转入公园路。走右边的第二条路。
7) It’s five kilometers away. It’s a long way from here.
离这大约5公里。离这有一段很长的路。
8) It’s 100 metres along on the left. 沿这一直走，在左边大约100米处。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇3】
九年级英语第九单元第一课时教学反思
英语对于现在的学生来说，是一门比较难学的学科。许多学生都说英语真困难，不愿意学习它。从而导致他们学习的不太理想。最近，有件事情使我感触太深了。认识到了学生不是学不好，而是存在着有他们不愿意学习的因素.由于学习谈论发明时间，发明人和用途等，我觉得直观教学比较适合，所以我就把这节课制作成了课件。这样想的目的主要是避免课堂上的麻烦，节省时间。但实际上的效果却是我没有想到的。
Teaching contents:
When was it / were they invented?
Who was it / were they invented by?
What is it / are they used for?
Teaching aims:
Let students talk about the dates of inventions , inventors and functions.Teaching tools:
tape recorder and powerpoint
本节课的收获和优点：
1．学生在本节课中得到了较为充分的口头训练，而且面比较广。尤其对九年级即将参加明年英语口语考试的同学，这一点尤为重要。课堂上在我极力鼓励和表扬下，一些原来在课堂上很难开口读英语的学生，本堂课上有极大的进步。
2．我觉得本节课中，对本课的话题的导入做得比较好。即从自然交流
Are you busy ? Do you usually stay up late?
So ,we should turn on the light.Look,what are these? 引出light bulbs.通过提问Who invented the light bulb? 引出发明家Edison及inventor
由Edison invented the light bulb.到被动语态The light bulb was invented by Edison.让学生观察理解被动语态的意思和基本结构。
让学生通过问答学练结合What’s it? S: It’s a car.T: Karl Benz invented the car.S: The car was invented by Karl Benz.T:What’s it? S: It’s a telephone..T: Bell invented the car.S:The telephone was invented by Bell.这样顺其自然地导入能调动学生的积极性，能让他们思考问题且用简短的语言回答，为后面的课堂话题真正展开作好铺垫。
3．能充分利用多媒体容量大，直观性强的特点。利用科学、历史等学科中对发明物和发明家的理解（如：爱迪生发明电灯泡，卡尔发明汽车，贝尔发明电话等信息）学生感兴趣的来调动学生思考的积极性。
从本节课的收获中，我觉得由于学生接触课件比较少，所以他们感觉非常的新鲜。上演练课的时候，学生学课时教学反思的特别的认真。他们积极的、认真的读课文，听我解讲课文中的重点知识。也在积极的动脑回答、思考我所给他们出的问题。整堂课给我的感觉是学生没有一个在偷懒，都在认真的学习,哪怕是对英语一点兴趣都没有的学生。自然而然这一节课的效果是出乎我所意料的。过后, 我就在办公室里反思为什么这节课上的这么好？学生为什么对我已经学过的内容表现出这么大的反应?我的最大的感触就是，使用了新鲜的东西,学生感兴趣的方式方法来引导他们学习。这就意味着，上课要不断的给学生新鲜感，要培养他们对学习英语的兴趣。不是说“兴趣是最好的老师吗？”我就是在这一节课中给学生不同的学习方法,也可以说是他们比较感兴趣的,抓住他们的注意力。最大限度的发挥他们本身的潜力，由他们原先的被动学习变为现在的主动的学习。正因为他们对本节课充满着兴趣,所以就有很大的乐趣去学习,从而就很顺利地完成了本节课的教学任务的。
而且我觉得现在的英语教学要以学生为主体，教师为引导。多鼓励差生开口说英语，并能及时地表扬他们。教师要有课堂效益意识。教学效益首先体现在课堂教学信息量、教学活动的广度和密度以及媒体的使用上。有效的媒体手段有助于课堂容量、密度和速度的提高。尤其是在英语课堂上适当地使用多媒体手段，不但可以活跃课堂，更能提高学生的参与面，短、频、快的大容量课堂节奏能有效的吸引并集中学生的学习注意。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇4】
maybe也许 countryside乡村 camera照相机 film胶卷
drink饮料 bring带来 weatherman 天气预报员 cut割；切
degree度数 stop阻止 pack打包/行李 snowman雪人
nothing much没什么 look forward to盼望 go climbing去爬山
It doesn’t matter.没关系 best wishes最真挚的祝愿
in the world全世界 That’s a pity!真糟糕/遗憾！
go sightseeing去游览 have a picnic去野餐
1) Listen! Tomorrow’s weather report is on the radio.
听！收音机里正在播放天气预报。
2) I hope you won’t forget us. 我希望你不要忘记我们。
3) The snowmen will slowly becomes water when it gets warm.
当天气变暖时，雪人会慢慢变成水。
4) I will send you a postcard. 我会给你寄一张明信片。
5) I’m waiting for your answer. Please write to me soon.
我在等你的来信。请尽快给我写信。
6) Thanks for inviting me. I’d love to go with you.
谢谢你的邀请。我很乐意和你去。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇5】
新目标英语九年级第八单元短语动词小结
常见短语动词结构有下面几种：
1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜
这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动
词和副词之间，也可放在短语动词后。2.动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。
3.动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出 run out of 用完，耗尽
4.动词+名词(介词)如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 1.cheer(sb.)up使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴 clean up 打扫 clean-up n.打扫
2.homeless adj.无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩
home n.家
3.hand out 分发 hand out bananas give out 分发 give out sth to sb.分….给某人
give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟
give away 赠送 捐赠 give away sth.to ….give away money to kids
give sb.sth.给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱
give sth.to sb.给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 4.sick adj.生病的 作表语、定语 ill adj.生病的 作表语，不能作定语
5.volunteer to do v.志愿效劳、主动贡献 volunteer n.志愿者
e up with 提出 想出 === think up 想出
catch up with 赶上 追上
7.put off doing 推迟做某事
put on 穿上(指过程)put up 张贴
8.write down 写下 记下
9.call up 打电话
make a telephone call 打电话
10.set up 成立 建立
The new hospital was set up in 2000.这座医院是在2000年成立的。11.each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用
every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用
12.put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用
They put the new machine to use.他们把新机器投入使用
13.help sb.(to)do 帮助某人做某事 help him(to)study help sb.with sth.帮助某人做某事 help him with English help do 帮助做某事 help study 14.plan to do 计划做某事
plan + 从句
I plan to go to Beijing.=== I plan(that)I will go to Beijing.我计划去北京。15.spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing.我花了一天的时间去参观北京。
spend… on sth.花费…在… I spent 3 years on English.16.not only … but(also)… 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分
(1)引导以 not only …but(also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。
因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but(also)….是倒装句。
也是说得要把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：
①Not only can I do it but(also)I can do best.我不仅能做到而且做得最好。
⑵Not only…but(also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和
数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：
①Not only Lily but(also)you like cat.不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。
②Not only you but(also)Lily likes cat.不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。常见的就近原则的结构有：
Neither… nor…即不…也不…(两者都不)Neither you nor I like him.我和你都不喜欢他。
Either… or… 不是…就是…(两者中的一个)Either Lily or you are a student.Not only …but(also)…
There be 17.join 参加(指参加团体、组织)如：join the Party 入党
take part in 参加(指参加活动)如： take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 18.①run out of == use up 用完 用尽
I have run out of money.== I have used up money.我已经用完了钱。
②run away 逃跑 The monkey has run away from the zoo.这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。
③run to + 地方 跑到某地
19.take after(在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像
be similar to 与..相像
take after 相像
look after 照顾
take care of 照顾 out 算出 结局
The situation worked out quite well.情况的结局非常好 Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗？ 21.hang out 闲荡 闲逛
I like to hang out at mall with my friends.我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。22.be able to do 能 会
be unable to do 不能 不会
23.thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如： thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我
新目标九年级英语课件【篇6】
1．aloud adv．出声地(使别人能听得到)朗读是学英语的一个好方法。
▲loud adj.大声的，声音洪亮的，loud—louder—loudest 他说话声音很大以便于每个人都能听得到他。▲adv.loud—louder—loudest don’t talk so loud．the kids are reading． 说话小声些，孩子们正在看书。(speak)louder，please!请再说高一些!▲loudly adv吵吵闹闹地，噪声地 我听到有人在使劲敲门。
they are talking loudly in the next room． 他们在隔壁说话声很大。她声音很甜美。
她提高了嗓音队便于别人能听清楚。因为咳嗽，他失声了。▲noise n噪音，吵闹 别弄出那么大的噪音。
i heard a strange noise outside． 我听到外边奇怪的声音。
▲sound n．(自然界中的)声音，响声 声音的传播比光慢。
3．memory n．(计算机的)储存器
a lot of information is stored in the memory． 计算机的储存器能储存很多信息。▲n．记忆力
车祸后他的记忆力很差了。▲n.回忆，怀念
我对童年有美好的回忆。
▲memorize／memorise vt.记住，背过 他能很快记住很多单词。
4.frustrate vt．使失望，使沮丧 他上大学的梦想遭受挫折。
▲frustrating adj.令人失望的 他所说的话很令人失望。
她觉得看英语电影很令人失望(因为看不懂)。▲frustrated adj.失望的，沮丧的 当他再次考试没及格后，他很失望。5．add vt.增加，加
she tasted the soup and added more salt． 她尝了尝汤，又加了些盐。▲add to 增添
他的到来给我们添了很多麻烦。
▲add up to 总计达„„，加起来„„ 我们班上学生的数目加起来是55人。▲vt.补充说，又说
他和我们说了再见，又说他会再来看我们的。我们队赢了的消息令所有的人很激动。那场足球赛很令人激动。
当听到那个消息，我们很激动。
7．speak(speak—spoke—spoken)说(语言)，讲话 你会说法语吗? 你知道谁要在会上发言? 当我给他打电话时，他正在和他的朋友谈话。你们在说什么? ▲say 说(后接说的内容)他在会上说了什么? 她说下周回来。▲tell 告诉
tell sb sth 告诉某人某事(接双宾语)是谁告诉你的那个消息? ▲讲，说
tell stories讲故事，tell a lie撒谎，tell the truth说实话 我小的时候，奶奶经常给我讲故事。
don’t believe him!he is telling a tie． 别信他!他在撒谎。
老实说，我不太同意你的意见。▲adj.巧完整的，完全的 你会造完整的句子吗? 他对我来说完全是陌生的。
那时我们之间的秘密，所以不要告诉别人。▲adj.秘密的
咱们不让别人知道此事。泄露秘密。
10．impress vt．使感动，给„„深刻印象 他的事迹给在场的人留下了深刻的印象。那个国家的美景打动了我们所有的人。、、▲impressed adj.(被)感动的 我们被他的话所感动。
11.native n.当地人，本国人
我们在巴西度假时，就像当地人那样生活。the kangaroo is a native of australia． 袋鼠是产于澳洲的动物。
▲native speaker 生来就说某种语言的人
他的英语说得太好了，我们都认为他是个本地人。▲native language 母语
马克思出生在德国，法语是他的母语。important phrases(重点词组)2．first of all 首先
5．spoken english 英语口语 8．1ater on 以后；随后
10．native speakers 生来就说某种语言的人 11．not at ail 根本不；一点也不 12．end up 结束
14．make up 组成；编造
15．enjoy doing sth 喜欢做某事 16．take notes 做笔记 17．make mistakes 犯错误 19．read aloud 朗读
20.have trouble(in)doing sth 做某事有困难 你怎样准备考试? ▲study for a test prepare for a test 准备考试 一 昨天晚上我打电话时你在干什么? 一 我在准备数学测验。我听录音准备英语测验。
▲by 靠，用(方法，手段等)，后接动名词(doing„)he makes a living by repairing bikes． 他靠修车为生。
▲listen vi．后加to再接名词。当我到家时，姐姐正在听音乐。听!有人在敲门。
他靠求助于老师来学习。
▲ask sb for help求助于某人
— 如果你有麻烦，你可以求助于我。一 谢谢。我会的。
你曾经和朋友练习过会话吗? ▲ever adv.用于疑问句和否定旬中，“曾经” 你担心考试会不及格吗? 听录音怎么样? 今晚去看电影怎么样? 靠朗读来练习发音怎么样? read aloud 朗读
reading aloud is very helpful in leaning english． 朗读在学英语中很有帮助。
▲a lot 代表一个不可数名词。例如： 他虽然很小，但他知道很多。别那样和父母说话。
8．it improves my speaking skills． 它能提高我的口语技巧。
▲improve vt.改进，改善，提高 他的工作在慢慢改进。他的发音大大提高了。▲speaking skill 口语技巧 listening skill 听力技巧 听懂不同的声音很困难。
▲too + adj.／adv.+ to do “太„„而不能„„”。又如： 他太小，不能上学。她跑得太慢追不上我。
▲ask sb about sth 询问某人关于„„的情况
ask her about the pen that you lost．she may have found it． 问问她你丢的钢笔，也许她捡到了。谁能告诉我记单词的最好办法是什么? 她说记流行歌曲的歌词也有点帮助。教英语是我的工作。
▲a little有点，代表不可数名词，其反义词为a lot。你的咖啡里想加糖吗? 一yes．just a little． 好，要一点点。
12．he’s been learning english for six years and really loves it． 他学英语有六年了，并且很喜欢它。
▲“has／have been doing sth”现在完成进行时，表示从过去某一时间开始持续到现在，还要进行下去的动作。又如：
she has been learning english for 5 years． 她学英语有五年了。
he has been reading for 2 hours and hasn’t finished it yet． 他看书有两个小时了，但还没有完成。
他发现看英语电影很令人失望，因为人们说话太快。i like playing basketball． 我喜欢打篮球。
▲find sb／sth + n.／adj.／doing “发现某人„„”，后面的“n.／adj.／doing”作宾语补足语。又如：
我发现他是个勤奋的学生。我发现物理很难学。
当她到家时，她发现他躺在床上病了。她补充说和朋友练习会话一点帮助都没有。照看孩子们是她的工作。
▲not„at all 一点也不，用来加强语气，又如： 我一点也不同意他的意见。
我们会因为某件事变得很激动，最后用汉语来描述。▲end up达到某种状态或采取某种行动，又如：
at first he said nothing but he ended up apologizing． 一开始，他什么也不说，到头来还是道了歉。
我正在就关于学习英语作调查。我能问你几个问题吗? ▲do a survey about sth／doing sth 关于„„作调查 上周，我们就网上冲浪作了个调查。
▲some用于疑问句时，表示希望得到肯定回答，如果只是询问信息，可以用any代替some用于疑问句和否定句中。又如： 你能借给我些钱吗?(希望得到肯定回答)did you buy her any gifts? 你给她买礼物了吗?(询问信息)17．1 often keep an english notebook． 我经常记英语笔记。
▲keep vt.记录(某事)，在某物上做书面记载 她写日记有20多年了。
i have the habit of keeping notes． 我有记笔记的习惯。
most of the students love reading． 多数学生喜欢看书。
19．1 make mistakes in grammar． 我在语法方面老犯错误。
▲make a mistake／make mistakes 犯错误 当说英语时不要怕犯错误。by mistake 错误地．
你知道炸薯片是被错误发明的吗? 我不知道怎样使用逗号。我不知道该做什么。你能告诉我何时出发吗? 你为什么不加入一个英语俱乐郝来练习说英语昵? 当交通很拥堵时，你为什么不骑白行车上学呢? ▲join加入某组织成为其中的成员，take part in参加某种活动，attend参加会议，报告，演讲等。例如：
his father joined the party in 1976． 他爸爸是1976年入的党。
工作之余人们经常参加体育活动。
i attended an important meeting yesterday． 昨天我参加了一个会。我没有同伴一起练习英语。老师有话要说。
he has no room to live in． 他没有房子住。
起初，对我来说听懂老师在班里讲话都不是件容易的事。▲first of all 最初，首先
first of all she just smiled，then she started to laugh． 最初她只是笑，后来才放声大笑。对我来说学好物理很难。
it is important to learn english.学英语很重要。
一开始，她说得太快了，我不能听懂所有的话。他起初没钱，可是后来相当富有了。
▲not„every + 可数名词单数 = not all + 复数名词表示部分否定“并非所有的”又如： 你没必要记住所有的字。不是所有的学生都住得离学校远。
后来，我意识到如果有些词听不懂没关系。▲later on 后来，以后
起初事情进展地很顺利，但后来他们遇到了麻烦。▲realize vt.意识到，认识到(有一个逐渐认识的过程)，不用于进行时和被动语态。例如： 总有一天你会意识到你错了。
▲that引导的是realize的宾语从句，在宾语从句中又出现了if引导的条件状语从旬。例如：
如果你不会开车没关系。
我还害怕在班里发言，因为我怕同学会嘲笑我。
▲be afraid of sth／to do／of doing sth 害怕／不敢／恐怕做某事 i used to be afraid of the dark． 我过去常常怕黑。
she’s afraid to go／of going out alone at night． 她害怕夜晚独自出去。▲might 表示可能性
他可能知道她的电话号码，但我不确定。▲laugh at sb 嘲笑
it’s bad manners to laugh at people in trouble． 嘲笑陷入困境的人不礼貌。
我认为做大量的听力练习是成为一名好的语言学习者的秘诀之一。他是喜欢足球的学生中的一员。
另一个我发现很困难的东西是英语语法。▲that引导的是定语从句，修饰another thing，that在定语从句中作found的宾语。又如： 我能为你做点什么?(你买什么?)然后我用学过的语法造有独创性的句子。
▲start／begin to do sth = start／begin doing sth 开始做某事 真是不可思议了，这样做很有帮助。
▲it's amazing + 从句／to do sth “„„真是太惊奇了”。在国外遇到老朋友，真是太惊喜了。
现在我很喜欢英语，并在这学期得了个“a”。▲注意：“a”前边用不定冠词，选用冠词时要看字母的发音，即元音音素开头的用“an”。例如：
在单词“hour”里面，有一个“u”和一个“r”。她造完整的句子有困难。
▲have trouble in doing sth 做某事有麻烦／困难 he had trouble in understanding native speakers． 他听外国人说话有困难。
新目标九年级英语课件【篇7】
新目标英语九年级上册
Unit1 How do you study for a test?
SectionA(1a-2c)Shangma Primary School Zhao Xiaoyan 教案设计
一、Teaching aims:(教学目标)Language goal（知识目标）：
掌握以下词汇：flashcard，vocabulary,aloud,pronunciation Talk about how to study English Ability goal（能力目标）：
学习使用“How do you study …? ”及其答语“I study by …” 句型
Emotion goal（情感目标）：
Talk about the ways of studying English;(谈论学好英语的方法)Give them the confidence to learn and enjoy English.（帮他们树立学好英语的信心）
二．Teaching importance and difficulties（教学重难点）how 副词，“怎样，如何”,对于方式，手段等的提问；
by 介词，“用……的方式”, “以……的方法”,后跟名词或动词的-ing形式
How do you study for a test /learn English? I study/learn by listening to tapes/ by working with friends…/by studying with a group...三．Teaching steps（教学步骤）
Step 1 Lead-in with a free talk(自由对话导入新课)（2分钟）
Greeting with the students;Hello,everyone1Welcome back to school.I’m very happy to see you again.Most of you got good grades last term ,congratulations!Of course,don’t lose your heart if you didn’t get good grades.OK , Today ,let‟s talk about how to study for a test and how to learn English well.（展示课题）
Step 2 Pre-task（3分钟）
T:Learning to learn is very important.And learning to pass a test is also important.You know we can study by many different ways.Now Let’s ask you how to study for a test.T:How do you study for a test,Lili? S:read the textbook.T:Oh,you study by reading the textbook.让学生给出不同的回答，强调语言结构verb+by/with gerund.,教师不断强化句型，让学生有个模式进行训练。
Step 3 While-task（38分钟）
1.Task1 1a checking the ways you study
Ask a student to read the ways.T:Check the ways you study for an English test and add other ways you sometimes use.Then ask questions to check their answers.2 Task 2 1b Listen carefully for the tape（仔细听力练习）First let the students look at the picture,and say how do they study.: By making flashcard, by listening to tapes, by asking the teacher for help Then listen to the tape, write the letters from the picture above.Next check the ansers:(1)Mei studies by making flashcards, so the answer is „„a”.(2)Pierre（皮埃尔）studies by asking the teacher for help, so the answer is „„c”(3)Antonio（安东尼奥）studies by listening to the tape, so the answer is „„b”.Task3 Pairwork
Talk about the ways of stuying with your partner? A:How do you study for a test?
B:I study by working with a group.4Task4 2a Listen to the tape, check the questions you hear Ask the students to read through the questions.Then ask them to listen to the tape careful.Check the answers.2a Listen again and match the answers.Ask them to read the answers,then match the answers with the qustions above.Finally,check the answers.5Task5 2c Pairwork
Make conversations using the information from 2a and 2b.A； Have you ever studied with a group? B：Yes ,I have.I‟ve learned a lot that way./ No ,I haven‟t.Step4 Homework（1分钟）
1,Finish Self-check.2,write down the ways of learning you know.Step5 Ending words.（总结下课）（1分钟）
Well ,that‟s all our today‟s lesson.I had a great time with you..See you later.板书
Unit 1 How do you study for a test? How do you study for a test? I study by reading textbook.by making vocabulary lists.by asking the teacher for help.by listening to the teachers.read aloud
speaking skills How/What about doing sth.? too… to…
新目标九年级英语课件【篇8】
新目标英语九年级Unit 8第一课时说课稿
今天我说课的题目是初中英语人教版九年级Unit8 I’ll help clean up the city parks.本课的中心话题是提供帮助。引导学生关注社会,利用自己的特长为他人社会做事情。整个说课我将分成四个大部分进行讲述：即教材分析、教法分析、学法指导、教学过程。
一、教材分析
（一）教材的地位和作用
本单元的中心话题是提供帮助，整个单元的内容是围绕提供帮助，以及志愿活动展开生动、活泼的对话，和阅读。而且这些志愿活动与我们的生活密切相关，通过本课的学习，要求学生能够谈论自己帮助别人的方式，学会关心社会，关心他人。从而关注身边的生活环境，从小事做起。引导学生体会志愿活动，投身于社会公益事业。
（二）教学目标
根据《英语课程标准》关于总目标的具体描述，结合第八单元的教材内容，将本单元的教学目标细化：
Knowledge and Ability objects(知识与能力目标):（1）重点词语 ：重点掌握如下描绘性的形容词 clean up hunger homeless cheer up give out（2）重点句型：I'd like to work outside． You could give out food at a food bank（3）培养学生能够运用所学的语言目标进行简单的语言训练的能力.(4)能够听懂磁带上的每句话.Course and Methods(过程与方法)：可采取小组讨论的方法进行知识与技能的训练,调动已有的知识、根据情景推测句子的含义。Moral object(情感态度与价值观目标)：通过对本单元的学习，增强爱心，同情心，以及社会责任感。
Teaching Key Points and Difficulties(教学重、难点)
1、Key point：一般将来时的应用.2、Difficult point：一些动词短语的用法.Teaching Methods(教学方法)：Watching and describing methods listening method Pairwork Teaching Aids(教具)：Tape pictures small blackboard
二、教法分析
1．教学设计思路与教材处理：
《新目标英语》中的具体语言目标是通过各种各样的Tasks来实现的；学生需要运用具体而特定的行动来完成一定的交际任务。整个教学过程中，各种语言结构与语言功能与不同的学习任务有机的结合。任务活动所谋求的效果不是一种机械的语言训练，而是侧重在执行任务中学生自我完成任务的能力和策略的培养；重视形式在完成任务过程中的参与和在交流活动中所获得的经验。因此本节课我将始终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言，让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动，通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验，让学生在用中学，在学中用（Learning by using, learning for using）。2．教学手段
多媒体辅助：用flash 软件将本课所需要的动画、录音、图片、文字、图表和音乐制成CAI软件，使抽象的语言变得直观，为学生运用英语进行交际创设情景，实现师生互动，生生互动和人机互动的多向交流。
三、学法指导
新制定的《英语课程标准》把“培养学生学习英语的兴趣，树立自信心，培养良好学习习惯和形成有效策略，发展自主学习和合作精神”放在了首位。依据课改的精神，我从以下几个方面对学生进行学法指导。
1、学习方法的指导
培养学生观察力，想象力，记忆力以及思维能力。用生动的课件调动学生的感官进行听说读写的训练。
2、学习积极性的调动
我在教学过程中创造一种开放的，和谐的，积极互动的语言氛围，把课堂变成有声有色的舞台，让学生在乐中学。
3、学习能力的培养
通过连贯的听说读写，游戏，竞赛等，培养学生的交际能力，发展他们的思维能力。
4、学习策略的指导
本节课将在课堂活动中把学生分成四人小组的学习小组，让他们围绕着课堂任务分工合作，在活动中相互探讨、相互交流、相互合作，从而获得知识、技能和情感体验，发展他们的能力。创建开放式，探究式的课堂，有意识渗透学习策略的训练。我让学生观察课件画面，回答问题，让学生学会使用认知策略；让学生表演对话，实现交际策略；引导学生交际，主动练习和实践，是调控策略的体现。充分利用多媒体，录音，卡片等是资源策略。
四、教学过程
Step1.Discuss and write(导入新课)
1.Ask questions: 1)Have you ever helped others? 2)How do you feel about helping others?
3)Can you tell us your experience of helping others? Ask the students to discuss in small groups
Step2.Guessing games（猜游戏--新单词）
Show some pictures with the new verb phrases, let the student guess the meanings of the phrases in small groups.Divide the whole class into six groups, have a competition.Step 3.Brain storm（头脑风暴自主学习）
Ask the students to look at the bulletin board and then list other ways they could help people.Step4.1b.Listen and complete the sentences(听的技能）
Ask the student just listen for the first time, then write for the second time.Check the answers.Then ask students to read the four conversations with their partners
Step 5.Summary(梳理归纳）
clean up.cheer up.give out.Use the game to practice the phrases.Step6.1c.Pairwork（英语交际能力）
Call their attention to the example in the speech bubbles in 1a,ask them to make up similar the conversations to class.Step7.Homework
Tell the students to do the homework：
1.Make up one sentence with each of the following phrasal verbs:
clean up.cheer up.give out.2.Practice conversations with partners after class
五、板书设计
Unit 8 I’ll hel p clean up the city parks.The Period 1 Phrasal verb:
1.clean up—make a place clean and tidy, put things in order We should always clean up the dirty parts of the sea.2.cheer up—make someone feel happy The good news cheers everyone up.3.set up —We are going to set up a food
新目标九年级英语课件【篇9】
新目标九年级英语第八单元说课稿
Unit 8 I’ll help clean up the city parks
(section B)
田涓
一、教学理念
《英语课程标准》(实验稿)明确提出了基础教育阶段的总体教学目标是“以学生语言技能、语言知识、情感态度、学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础，培养学生综合运用英语语言的能力”。新教材也处处体现了以学生为主体的教学理念和任务型教学模式。新的教学理念根据学习的内容，设计各种交际任务活动，让学生在完成活动任务的过程中习得语言，从而激发学生学习英语的兴趣和积极性，培养学生用英语表达思想和交际的能力；同时增强学生参与意识、竞争意识和团队精神，从而为学生创造一个积极而愉悦的教学氛围，使学生真正成为学习的主人，真正做到学在其中，乐在其中，为学生的终身学习打下坚实的基础。
二、教材分析
1、教材的地位及作用
这套教材采用任务型语言教学(Task-based Language
Teaching)模式。教材中每单元都设计一个或几个与该单元话题有关的任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中，使用英语获取信息，用英语进行交流，培养运用英语解决实际问题的能力。
本单元是初中英语新教材九年级第八单元，本单元的核心话题为“volunteering”，围绕着主动提供帮助，以观察图片、听力理解、阅读理解等训练方式和独立学习、合作交流、完成任务等形式完成目标语言的输入，学习
“I will „”，“I would
like„”等句型和一些重要动词短语为主要学习内容，并且设置任务型综合性语言实践活动，让学生在交际活动中，学会如何正确地用英语表达自己的意见和建议，重在培养学生的习得语言运用能力、实践能力、合作能力及创新意识。
2、教学目标
（1）知识与能力
1）重点词汇：
●put off, hand out, call up, give away, run out of, clean up，set up, take after, fix up, cheer up, give out, hunger, sign, repair
重点句型：
● I ’d like to work outside.● I”ll help clean up the city park.● You could give out food at a food bank.2）、依托本单元的语言素材提高学生听、说、读、写及自学、创新和沟通能力。熟练掌握“I will „”，“I would
like„”等句型，培养学生运用语言的能力。
3）、培养学生善于听说、乐于听说的良好习惯和学习能力。
4）、在表演和讨论中培养学生乐于表达的人际交往能力和知识创新能力。
（2）过程与方法
1）通过短文阅读，进一步提高学生阅读能力；
2）通过复述吉米的故事，提高学生的口语表达能力；
3）通过采访及小组合作等方式，进一步提高学生的语言综合运用能力。
（3）情感 态度及价值观
1）、深刻理解志愿者工作是伟大的；
2）、帮助他人让你我他更开心，让世界更美好；
3）、志愿者工作是一种社会文化，是世界范围的热点话题。
3.Pair work
重点：“I will „”，“I would like„”句型及部分重要动词短语。
难点：做什么样的志愿者工作及如何去做？
确立重点与难点的依据：根据教学大纲的要求，及本单元在教材中所处的地位和作用。
三、学情分析
学情剖析：初三学生正处于感性向理性的转型期，求知欲和表现参与意识很强，有一定的逻辑分析能力，同时也需要教师的积极引导。
本单元的主题是开展有关志愿者活动，是学生很感兴趣的话题。学生可以采用Teamwork和Role
playing的学习策略，学习新词汇，掌握重点句型和主要内容，同时能比较好地解决类似问题（志愿者活动、制定活动计划），既能运用所学知识，联系实际生活，又能提高解决问题以及综合运用语言能力。
四、教法、学法设计
为达成上述教学目标，根据Go for
it!教材的特点，我们将运用任务型教学途径，而学生也相应地采取自主、合作、探究的学习方式。本单元采用Teamwork、Interview、Telling
stories、Discussion和Role playing的学习策略，掌握重要短语和句型，提高听说读的能力。
1、教法设计
教学内容的核心要求符合科学规律、认识规律，因此我在教学过程中，正确把握教育教学的特点，倡导自主、合作、探究的学习方式，激发兴趣，调动思维，培养创新能力。通过层层任务导入，精讲巧练，由浅入深，由易到难，由已知到未知，循序渐进地深化教学内容。展开以教师为主导，以学生为主体的师生双边活动。采用视听法、角色扮演、情景交际法和小组互助型学习法，并把竞争机制引入课堂。
(1)视听法，主要通过老师提问、学生回答等方式提供让学生听、说的练习机会；
（2）角色扮演和情景交际法，让学生利用听力和课文内容进行交流，让学生进行采访式、讲故事形式在做中学，在实践中获得信息，习得英语。
（3）小组互助型学习法，小组合作解决志愿者活动中做什么、如何去做等问题。
对教材的处理上本着，以“旧”启“新”，以“练”促“学”，以“熟”生“巧”的原则，通过听说、朗读、对话、句子接龙和小组表演，提高口语表达能力，且英语口语表演能够活跃课堂气氛，使学生愉快学习，真正做学习的主人。
2、学法设计
本单元主要的任务就是要让学生学会运用习得语言知识结合自己谈论有关志愿者活动，在任务型活动中学习并巩固本单元的内容。因此在教学中，教师主要是让学生学会：
1）、课前预习，尝试自学；
2）、培养学生大胆发言、积极思维、合作能力；
3）、课堂认真听讲，养成好习惯，提高学习效率；
4）、复习巩固，拓展新知。
五、教学过程：
（一）、导入
1、让学生回忆八年级下册所学的北京大学毕业生志愿支边支教活动内容；
2、作学生曾做或想做的志愿者活动现场调查。
（二）、任务型听力
1、给出一组图片，让学生描述志愿者活动，了解他人的志愿者活动，同时复习前部分所学短语。（图片展示由普通人、名人事迹过渡到本课主要内容自行车男孩志愿者的故事）；
2、听力任务的热身：学习动词短语（要求学生读准发音，释义并造句），通过这种方式活用短语从而代替死记硬背，提高学生学习兴趣，也为下面听力和阅读作铺垫；
3、听：听中找重点短语，理解故事情节。听后两人一组进行模拟记者与志愿者采访活动。通过情景教学和角色扮演让学生置身其中，充分体验志愿者活动并提高了学生的语言技能。
（三）、任务型阅读（听后留一悬念，志愿者活动中遇到困难怎么办？）
1、学生找出文章的重要短语；
2、学生找出志愿者男孩做志愿者工作中解决问题的方法的句子；
3、读后串联听力与阅读内容，讲述小男孩的故事，训练口语的同时熟练掌握教材重点难点内容---怎样去做志愿者工作。
（四）、任务型讨论（小组互助性学习，激活学生思维）
创设情景，放手给学生想、做、说的机会。我设计有两项小组任务型讨论，全班分成四小组，每组任选其一：
1、以2008年奥运会为主题，围绕志愿者活动，展开讨论做什么、如何做及为什么做；
2、列举国际上几个主要的志愿者组织，如绿色和平、联合国儿童基金会、世界野生动物基金会等，讨论怎样参加国际组织志愿者活动；
（1）、先让学生自行讨论可以避免受教师的想法所局限没有自己的见解。
（3）、我认为学生合作精神的培养尤为重要，学生通过这一环节既能够有自主学习的机会，又锻炼了与他人的合作，并在探索中有其个性思维发散的空间。
（4）、当学生探讨后，以此为内容写一篇作文。我布置这项作业的依据是新课标的要求。新课标指出：写作需有明确的动机和积极的态度，写作的题目应结合学生的实际需要，使他们具有写作的愿望，这样他们才能写作，才能发挥自己的思维能力，而不是为了应付教师而做的作业。
六、板书
Offer help: I’d like to …
I will …
I want to …
You could …
Being a volunteer work you could do and then make a conversation.。is great!
The story of “Bike boy”:
how to help others(listening)—problem
How to solve the problems
(reading)—solution.Phrasal verbs:
put off, hand out, call up, give
away，run out of, clean up, set up, take after，fix up, cheer up, give out, sign, repair